Jeep 2013, 2013 Grand Cherokee, Grand Cherokee Owner's manual

Jeep 2013, 2013 Grand Cherokee, Grand Cherokee Owner's manual
13WK741-126-AF
Fifth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
2013 Grand Cherokee SRT8
FCA US LLC
2013
OWNER’S MANUAL
Grand Cherokee
SRT8
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .7
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .8
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
your satisfaction.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
ROLLOVER WARNING
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it not.
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
INTRODUCTION 5
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
injury. Drive carefully.
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Rollover Warning Label
Consult the following table for a description of the
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts prosymbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the
this Owner’s Manual:
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
1
6 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your
vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
plate located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also is stamped into the right
front body, behind the right front seat. Move the right
front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped
VIN. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
VIN Location
1
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Unlock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .19
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .25
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .28 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . .55
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .59
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .59
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .60
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .63
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Seat Belt Lock Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air
Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .75
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .107
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of
which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the detented ON/RUN position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
NOTE: With the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature, the Elecfeature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display the
Operating” for further information.
ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/RUN). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle on
the driver’s side should the battery in the vehicle or the
RKE transmitter go dead. The emergency key is also for
locking the glove box. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with
the security alarm armed, will result in the alarm sounding. Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery is
dead) into the ignition switch to disarm security alarm.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
then pull the key out with your other hand.
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature, the EVIC will
display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
• If you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the
shift lever in PARK, it may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch. If this occurs, rotate the key
to the right slightly, then remove the Key Fob as
described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap
Emergency Key Removal
the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
and stopped, but the Key Fob cannot be removed until
you obtain service.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
• The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
CAUTION!
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your
Key Fob will become locked in the ignition.
• Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in this
condition, damage could occur to the Key Fob or
ignition module. Only remove the emergency key
for locking and unlocking the doors.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either:
• Jump Start the vehicle.
• Charge the battery.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
(Continued)
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when
the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
position.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature, opening the
driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch is placed
in ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped) will cause the
reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorresult in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
or unlocked.
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
The system uses the factory-mated Key Fob with Remote
as possible by an authorized dealer.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
CAUTION!
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The • Do not make modifications or alterations to the
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
SENTRY KEY®
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
security protection.
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting
systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
Replacement Keys
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authovehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
is one that has never been programmed.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
still present (driver’s door, passenger door, other doors,
ignition) after three minutes, the headlights, park lamps
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and/or turn signals will flash for an additional 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
minutes.
subject to the following conditions:
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ• This device may not cause harmful interference.
ent. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
• This device must accept any interference that may be Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
received, including interference that may cause unde- one should go off in the future, you will need to know
sired operation.
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
General Information
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Rearming The System
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
liftgate, liftgate flipper glass, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior
switches for door locks, power liftgate and flipper glass
are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both
audio and visual signals, the horn will sound, the headlights will turn on, park lamps and/or turn signals will
flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the disturbance is
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
(RKE) transmitter.
further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, 3. If any doors are open, close them.
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙.
To Disarm The System
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the the following methods:
key is physically removed from the ignition.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
vehicle:
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
Vehicle Security Alarm.
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door the alarm will sound.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the NOTE:
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the • The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
doors or open any door.
(extreme bottom position).
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tamper Alert
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, or activate the panic alarm, from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob
with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need
to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
RKE transmitters.
2
Key Fob With Five-Button RKE Transmitter
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
system will also turn on.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerKnow Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa- Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
tion.
Remote Unlock Sequence
Illuminated Approach
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors, on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Flash Lamps With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lamps to flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE
transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To
change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa- you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time, or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
tion.
(24 km/h) or greater.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
NOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you turn the
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while
are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry
the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lamps
feature. The horn chirp feature can be turned on or off. To
and horn will remain on.
change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- Programming Additional Transmitters
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your InProgramming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
strument Panel” for further information.
performed at an authorized dealer.
Using The Panic Alarm
Transmitter Battery Replacement
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
battery.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights turn on, the park lamps will flash, the horn
will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot
Separating RKE Transmitter
3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers.
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch
a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two 1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
halves together.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
following conditions:
General Information
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve• This device must accept any interference received,
niently from outside the vehicle while still
including interference that may cause undesired opmaintaining security. The system has a range of
eration.
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could NOTE:
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
may reduce this range.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
How To Use Remote Start
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
All of the following conditions must be met before the • Ignition in Off position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™
engine will remote start:
vehicle
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate/Flipper Glass closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
To Enter Remote Start Mode
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute
cycle.
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Ajar
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
to the ON/RUN position.
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the
ON/RUN position.
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system • For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-Nwill disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
Go™ feature, the ignition switch must be in the
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
Start request.
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-NGo™ feature, the message “Remote Start Active —
Insert Key and Turn To Run” will display in the EVIC
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
until you insert the key. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Comfort System operation refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Information Center (EVIC)” for further information.
Features (SETUP)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Panel”.
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push
Start Button” will display in the EVIC until you push DOOR LOCKS
the START button.
The power door locks can be manually locked from
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
When remote start is activated, the heated steering each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
remote start is activated. These features will stay on upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). For more information on Remote Start
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer . Please see your authorized dealer for
service.
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
Power Door Lock Switch
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door doors when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is
will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
the vehicle before closing the door.
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
the ignition switch and the driver’s door is open, the
doors will not lock.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
2
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
• If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for 72
hours, the Passive Entry feature for the handle may
time out. Pulling the deactivated front door handle
will reactivate the door handle’s Passive Entry feature.
2
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob
present in the ignition.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outNOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in EVIC, all doors will unlock when you push the button
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙ is
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the button on the right side of
programmed in EVIC, the liftgate will unlock when you
the chrome accent bar, which is located on the liftgate
press the button on the liftgate For further information,
below the liftgate glass to lock or unlock the vehicle.
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
To Enter The Liftgate
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Liftgate Passive Entry Button
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
passenger door and rear doors which operate the front
passenger and rear passenger door windows. The win• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
dow controls will operate only when the ignition switch
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
NOTE:
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
Power Window Switches
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The power window switches remain active for up to 10 down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” moveminutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. ment, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
WARNING!
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in or
near the vehicle, or leave a vehicle with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the
power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
Auto Down Window Switches
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
2
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
Auto Up Window Switches
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to
the first detent and hold it to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Window Lockout Button
Wind Buffeting
The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To
disable the window controls on the rear doors, press the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
press the Window Lockout button again.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle and lift.
Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger
or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate.
Window Lockout Button
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Liftgate Flipper Glass
The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the
liftgate is unlocked. To open the flipper glass, push up on
the window switch located on the liftgate.
NOTE: The liftgate flipper glass will not open if the
liftgate is ajar.
Liftgate Release
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
NOTE: If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should occur,
an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftgate
trim panel.
WARNING!
Liftgate Glass Release
Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flipper glass closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened, connecPower Liftgate — If Equipped
tion to the rear window wiper is interrupted, preventing
activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass
The power liftgate may be opened by pulling
is open.
up on the liftgate handle or by pressing the
LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
(RKE) transmitter. Press the LIFTGATE button on the
RKE transmitter twice within five seconds, to open the
power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pressing the
button twice within five seconds a second time will close
the liftgate.
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the EVIC) and the liftgate
chime will be audible. For further information, refer to
⬙Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup)/
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your Instrument Panel⬙.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the front NOTE:
overhead console, or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
button located on left rear trim, near the liftgate opening.
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
Pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
once will close the liftgate only, this button cannot be
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftused to open the liftgate.
gate trim panel.
To operate the power liftgate manually in the open
direction, pull the liftgate handle once to initiate a power • If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
cycle and then pull the handle a second time to put
power liftgate functionality.
liftgate into manual mode.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the • The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
liftgate opening to operate. If the liftgate is not fully
(0 km/h).
open, press the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
open the liftgate, and then press it again to close.
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice • If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
position.
liftgate switches.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow
manual operation.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a
detection of an obstruction.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Knee bolsters for front seat occupants
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
all passengers
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
restraint)
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
item in a seat — if equipped
ger
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Please pay close attention to the information in this
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
possible.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
buckled up in a rear seat.
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
WARNING!
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
CHildren (LATCH).
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different cause severe injury or death to infants in that posirates of inflation based on several factors, including the tion.
severity and type of collision.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
2
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
(Continued)
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an
collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
the belt go around your lap.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate
Latch Plate to Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
Removing Slack From Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retracThe belt will automatically retract to its stowed positor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow it to retract fully.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a fold
that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
shoulder belt.
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the that fits you best.
anchor point.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the
shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child ReAdjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average, feature for each seating position.
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
Driver
Center
Passenger
button, verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched by
pulling downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it
First Row
N/A
N/A
ALR
is locked into position.
Second Row
ALR
ALR
ALR
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
• N/A — Not Applicable
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combina• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably years old and under should always be properly rewrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not strained in the rear seat.
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
the entire belt is extracted.
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
Equipped
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Energy Management Feature
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
worn snugly and positioned properly.
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
These head restraints are passive, deployable compoThis system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
identified by any markings, only through visual inspeccertain types of rear impacts.
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
2
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
AHR In Reset Position
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
NOTE:
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active
into the back decorative plastic half.
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authoReminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire deactivating BeltAlert®.
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occuBeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Lock Out
Seat Belt Extender
The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
the rear seat upper latch is engaged.
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts long enough. When it is not required, remove the exthroughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is tender and store it.
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
2
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for
Advanced Air Bags.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
the outboard side of the front seats.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the NOTE:
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
seat position.
but they will open during air bag deployment.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Air Bag System Components
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag system components:
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags, are located above the side windows and their • Air Bag Warning Light
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
• Steering Wheel and Column
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
(Continued)
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
2
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bags and SABIC air bags during impacts that require
side air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
SABIC, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the SABIC. The
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
area where the side curtain air bag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SAB; the performance could
be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the child.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags, SAB air bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
required, depending on several factors, including the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occuseverity and type of impact.
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bag.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and
Front Passenger Knee Air Bags are designed to provide
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide imcertain frontal collisions depending on several factors,
proved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
including the severity and type of collision. Advanced
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
protection.
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
and Front Passenger Knee Air Bags will not deploy in all
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collirequired for this vehicle.
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or the other hand, depending on the type and location of
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
Knee Impact Bolsters
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
severe initial deceleration.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
type of collision.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
Light in the instrument panel for approxiover time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
have deployed.
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colliturns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
away from an inflating air bag.
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruthe air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
collision.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about oneinflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This when it is inflated.
especially applies to children.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may SABIC air bags, and driver/passenger knee air bags may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Front And Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
• Unlock the doors automatically.
In front and side impacts, impact sensors — if equipped In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
impact events.
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
Enhanced Accident Response System
If A Deployment Occurs
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
until the ignition key is turned off.
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
removed.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have defloor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. bags will not be in place to protect you.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
WARNING!
immediately.
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retracprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conskin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation Maintaining Your Air Bag System
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s inWARNING!
structions for cleaning.
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
(Continued)
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during Event Data Recorder (EDR)
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
cycled to the ON/RUN.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
eight-second interval.
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
remains on while driving.
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint is designed to record such data as:
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
were buckled/fastened;
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
fuse is good.
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a times, including babies and children. Every state in the
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by United States, and every Canadian province, requires
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
crash investigation.
the rear seats rather than in the front.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear
seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit perivehicle’s seat belt alone:
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
the vehicle seat?
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or behind their back.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?
No
No
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes, center position
only.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
60/40 Seat LATCH Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
2
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located on
the back of the seat. To access the top tether
strap anchorages behind the rear seat, pull the
carpeted floor panel away from the seat back, this will
expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH — Second Row 60/40
Do not install a child restraint in the center position using
the LATCH system. Use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating position.
WARNING!
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manuanchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Vehicles With A Center Arm Rest Tether
For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position.
2
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the
arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
seat backing.
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the
strap located on the front of the arm rest.
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and
the following sections for more information about both
types of seat belts.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both Restraints in this Vehicle
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Yes, center position only.
Yes
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do
not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbetter fit.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
against the child seat.
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
attach a tether anchor.
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
in any direction.
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
vehicle seat.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chilposition. For some second row seats, you may need to
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get
attach a tether anchor.
a better fit.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
in any direction.
path.
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Anchorage
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position (see the
charts above), move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn 2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the
rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorinto the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
ages.
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
2
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
Top Tether Strap Mounting
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING!
The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind the
seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage — Center Seating Position
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
For center seating position route the tether strap over the or 90 km/h) are desirable.
seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
anchor located on the back of the seat.
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Transporting Pets
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. be detrimental and should be avoided.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
The engine oil is a high performance synthetic lubricant,
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
the transmission fluid and axle lubricant installed at the
a collision.
factory is high-quality and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid,
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
and lubricant changes should be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
(Continued)
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised Air Bag Warning Light
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
Seat Belts
not lit during starting, see your authorized
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced driving, have the system checked by an authorized
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. dealer.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Floor Mat Safety Information
WARNING! (Continued)
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
(Continued)
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
(Continued)
2
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts located and corrected immediately.
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Tires
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .121
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped . . . . . . . .125
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED .125
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 䡵 Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .165
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Reclining Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .188
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Battery Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .197
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . .197
▫ Ambient Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ SmartBeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .199
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights. . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ High/Low Beam Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .206
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .210
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation .
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .211
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . .218
. . .221
. . .222
. . .222
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED .214
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .227
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .231
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .232
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .254
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .236 䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . .240
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped . . .242
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — Without
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . .
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .252
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . .
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® .
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
.256
.258
.258
.258
.259
.260
.260
.261
.262
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .266
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Using HomeLink®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 䡵 COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .270
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . .
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
.273
.274
.274
.274
.275
.275
.275
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .276
▫ Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Cargo Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped .290
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Rear Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .277 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .281
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .295
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
in the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The mirror is twisted on the
windshield button counterclockwise and requires no
tools for mounting.
3
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
three detent positions:
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
• full forward
• full rearward and
• normal.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped
The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
inside mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press the mirror select button for the mirror that
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, press
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
3
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster if equipped. Some vehicles may
not be equipped with rear window defroster, in this case
the heated mirrors will still function as intended. Refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerProgrammable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
the visors.
increased coverage.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
automatically.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
Rear Detection Zones
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
when the vehicle is in PARK.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
3
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Side Monitoring
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Entering From The Rear
Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Modes Of Operation
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and deBlind Spot Alert
tected object are present on the same side at the same
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when muted.
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected NOTE:
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, • Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
the radio is muted.
system, the radio is also muted.
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
display the message “ Blind spot system unavailableAstronomy zone”. The side mirrors LED’s will be lit up
and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone.
Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile”,
Astronomy Zone — System Temporarily Unavailable
Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for
When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system
supported phones.
will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
For
Uconnect®
customer
support,
visit system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
www.UconnectPhone.com or call 1–877–855–8400. (U.S. used with the system at a time. The system is available in
Residents). Canadian Residents call, 1-800-465–2001 English, Spanish, or French languages.
(English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to conUconnect® Phone Button
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
button and Voice Com(Uconnect® Phone
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
button) that will enable you to
mand
the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
access the system. When you press the button you will The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
hear the word Uconnect® followed by a BEEP. The the Uconnect® Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
beep is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
Operation
Actual button location may vary with the ra- Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
dio. The individual buttons are described in the Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
“Operation” section.
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
specific command and then guided through the available
Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the
options.
Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
details.
prompt.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone • For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth® Device”.
switch), if so equipped.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the
Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions. Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a press of
button on the radio control head.
the
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instrucknow your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
tions for pairing.
the beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play some of the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
Help Command
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone • You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
pairing instructions:
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
button to begin.
• Press the
phones to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
“Device Pairing”.
connected to your Uconnect® System. The priority
allows the Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
and follow the audible prompts.
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identiand priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
Uconnect® Phone will use the priority three mobile
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
after the initial pairing process.
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial By Saying A Number
give the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile
• Press the
button to begin.
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
“Dial”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
• The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
• Press the
button to begin.
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect® Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
• The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
“Call”.
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
person you want to call.
Uconnect® website for supported phones.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previby Saying a Name” section.
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transmade to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
start the vehicle.
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected Add Names To Your Uconnect® Phonebook
to the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
button to begin.
• Press the
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry”.
able for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomphone is accessible.
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
• Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile
instead of “Bob”.
phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
NOTE:
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
book entry, if desired.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
phonebook entry that you are adding.
deleted or edited.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more • Press the
button to begin.
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
main menu.
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
entry that you wish to edit.
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible • Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automati• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
phonebook entry that you are editing.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
to the main menu.
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
from the list, press the
button while the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired entry and
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
say “Delete”.
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will
Entry” feature.
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
wish to delete.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
button to begin.
• Press the
language is deleted.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
“Phonebook Delete”.
deleted or edited.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names”.
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you
button
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
during the playing of the desired name, and say
“Call”.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language operations at this point.
is deleted.
• The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
• The selected number will be dialed.
List All Names In The Uconnect® Phonebook
• Press the
button to begin.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the current
mobile phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
button to accept the call. To reject the Progress
call. Press the
button until you hear a
call, press and hold the
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
press the
rejected.
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call
is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
“Toggling Between Calls” in this section. To combine Conference Call
two calls, refer to “Conference Call” in this section.
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
button until you hear a
hold), press and hold the
double
beep
indicating
that
the
two calls have been
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
joined
into
one
conference
call.
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the Three-Way Calling
button until you hear a single beep.
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while a
Toggling Between Calls
call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), described under “Making a Second Call While Curbutton until you hear a single beep, rent Call is in Progress”. After the second call has
press the
button until you
indicating that the active and hold status of the two established, press and hold the
hear
a
double
beep,
indicating
that
the
two calls have
calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on
been
joined
into
one
conference
call.
hold at a time.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
call. If the active call is terminated by the phone far
end, a call on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell phone-dependent. To bring the call
button until you
back from hold, press and hold the
hear a single beep.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
Redial
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
“Redial”.
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
• After the ignition key is cycled to OFF, a call can
was dialed from your mobile phone.
continue on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
from the Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
Uconnect® Phone.
• Press the
button to begin.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is cycled to OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Uconnect® Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
Language Selection
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is
using:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
button to begin.
• Press the
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
button to begin.
• Press the
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
language selection.
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
voice commands will be in that language.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and is usable across all languages.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
WARNING!
To use you Uconnect® Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect® System,
• and have network coverage.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
button and say Roadside Assistance
some systems. To do this, press the
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
If you need roadside assistance:
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your • Press the
button to begin.
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
for the mobile phone directly.
“Roadside Assistance”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
NOTE:
Voice Mail Calling
• The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the “Roadside
Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the Roadside Assistance references.
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
• If supported, this number may be programmable on system or an automated service, such as a paging service
button and say or automated customer service line. Some services resome systems. To do this, press the
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
“Setup”, followed by “Roadside Assistance”.
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
Paging
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
butcertain companies, which time out a little too soon to ton and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can NOTE:
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying a
press the
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
network configurations. This is normal.
is also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
number on a pager.
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager Barge In — Overriding Prompts
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
button and say, “Send.” The wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
call and then press the
system will prompt you to enter the name or number
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
send. The Uconnect® Phone will then send the correbutton and say, “Pair a Phone” to
could press the
sponding phone number associated with the phone- select that option without having to listen to the rest of
book entry, as tones over the phone.
the voice prompt.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
button to begin.
• Press the
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
one of the following:
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situayour mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
notification to inform you of your phone and network that the call did not go through even though the call is in
status when you are attempting to make a phone call progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
from your Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the
Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the
button and
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
say
“Transfer
Call”.
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
order to mute the Uconnect® Phone:
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect® Phone System, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
• Press the
button to begin.
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
• You can also press the
button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
that you wish to select.
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone • The selected phone will be used for the next phone
button and say “Secall. If the selected phone is not available, the
being announced, press the
lect” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sections for
Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest
an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired
priority phone present in or near (approximately
phone.
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
• When prompted, say “List Phones”.
Select Another Mobile Phone
Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones
This feature allows you to select and start using another • Press the
button to begin.
phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button to begin.
• Press the
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
prompts.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
button at any time while From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from
• You can also press the
the list is being played, and then choose the phone radio mode):
you wish to delete.
• Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
• Press the
button and say the “Voice Training”,
“System Training”, or “Start Voice Training” comUconnect® Phone Tutorial
mand.
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect®
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
You can either press the Uconnect® Phone button to
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For
best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Reset
• Press the
button.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
• low road noise,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
• smooth road surface,
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
• fully closed windows,
Voice Command
• dry weather condition.
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead • Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish acconsole (if equipped) and the mirror.
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• When navigating through an automated system such
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
you.
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is Far End Audio Performance
not in motion is recommended.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
• low-to-medium blower setting,
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
• smooth road surface,
entries are not similar.
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
• Even though international dialing for most number
not the Uconnect® Phone.
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Recent Calls
• Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for
you.
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download”, Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom- After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
ing and Missed Calls.
the message using Uconnect® Phone.
SMS
Send Messages:
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
your phone.
a new message:
Read Messages:
• Press the
button.
If you receive a new text message while your phone is • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
If you wish to hear the new message:
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
button.
• Press the
button while the system
To send a message, press the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say is listing the message and say “Send.”
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the name or 11.
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
12.
List of Preset Messages:
13.
1. Yes
14.
2. No
15.
3. Where are you?
16.
4. I need more direction.
17.
5. L O L
18.
6. Why
19.
7. I love you
20.
8. Call me
9. Call me later
10. Thanks
See You in 15 minutes
I am on my way
I’ll be late
Are you there yet?
Where are we meeting?
Can this wait?
Bye for now
When can we meet?
Send number to call
Start without me
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
Bluetooth® ON mode.
the system from announcing the new incoming mesPower-Up
sages.
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
• Press the
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
system.
will then be given a choice to change it.
button.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
Voice Commands
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
Voice Commands
redial
return to main menu
select phone
send
set up
pairing
phone book
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
return or main menu
select
phone settings or phone
set up
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
General Information
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System Operation
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, disc player,
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
USB Mass Storage Class device, iPod family of
the party responsible for compliance could void the
devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio device,
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
and a memo recorder.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface Sys• This device must accept any interference received,
tem as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
including interference that may cause undesired opVoice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
eration.
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws. Your attention should be focused on safely
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
button, you These commands are universal and can be used from any
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
command.
the active application.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
seconds, the system will present you with a list of a normal speaking volume.
options.
The system will best recognize your speech if the winIf you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
button, listen for set to low.
options, press the Voice Command
the beep, and say your command.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com- Main Menu
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
mand
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
Commands
menu.
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all In this mode, you can say the following commands:
times. Local commands are available if the supported
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
radio mode is active.
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
Changing The Volume
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth®
Streaming mode)
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com- • “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio AM (Or Radio Long Wave Or Radio
Medium Wave — If Equipped)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
USB Mode
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
To switch to USB mode, say “USB”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Disc Mode
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Play” (to play a Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
Name, Track Name, etc.)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say
“Bluetooth Streaming”. In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “List” (to list an Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.)
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Memo Mode
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In • “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
Setup
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
To switch to system setup, you may say on of the
butrecording, you may press the Voice Command
following:
ton to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
• “Change to system setup”
the following commands:
– “Save” (to save the memo)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —
During the playback you may press the Voice Combutton to stop playing memos. You promand
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
• “Main menu system setup”
• “Switch to system setup”
• “Change to setup”
• “Main menu setup” or
• “Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Language English”
• “Language French”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
• “Language Spanish”
• “Tutorial”
• “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
button first and wait for the beep before SEATS
Command
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Voice Training
vehicle.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogWARNING!
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect®
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say
or killed.
“Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
the system and will improve recognition.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the Voice Training
(Continued)
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas- the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
senger seat. The power seat switch is located on the the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control have reached the desired position.
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
when the desired position has been reached.
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
Passenger’s Power Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
the switch will raise and lower the position of the Adjustment
support.
Some models may be equipped with manual front driver
or passenger seats. The seats can be adjusted forward or
rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor.
Power Lumbar Switch
Adjustment Bar
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
(Continued)
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel can be
programmed to come on during a remote start. Refer to
“Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Heated Seats
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located near the bottom
center of the instrument panel (below the climate controls).
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Rear Heated Seats
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
with heated seats. There are two heated seat switches that
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
allow the rear passengers to operate the seats indepentime to shut the heating elements OFF.
dently. The heated seat switches for each heater are
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt located on the rear of the center console.
within two to five minutes.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting The ventilated seat switches are located on the switch
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 min- bank in the center stack of the instrument panel, just
below the climate controls.
utes.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler
in higher ambient temperatures.
There are two ventilated seat switches that allow the
driver and passenger to operate the seats independently.
The ventilated seat switches are used
to control the speed of the fans located
in the seat. Press the switch once to
choose HIGH, press it a second time to
choose LOW. Pressing the switch a
third time will turn the ventilated seat
OFF. When HIGH speed is selected
both lights on the switch will be illuminated. When LOW
speed is selected one light will be illuminated.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Head Restraints
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rearActive Head Restraints — Front Seats
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Push Button
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
3
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard headrests
are not removable.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
WARNING! (Continued)
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
60/40 Split Rear Seat
To Lower Rear Seat
Rear Head Restraint
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating
room.
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
(Continued)
NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to
fold down easily.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
Rear Seat Release
NOTE:
• Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the left
outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.
• Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the right
outboard seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
Rear Seat Folded
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
To Raise Rear Seat
Reclining Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
Rear Seat Release
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. One RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
• The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory
save function
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
Memory Seat Switch
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
4. Within 5 seconds, press and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display which
memory position has been set.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
NOTE:
1. Insert the ignition key fob, and turn the ignition switch • Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
to the ON/RUN position.
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if • The Recall Memory with Remote Linked to Memory
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
feature can be enabled through the Electronic Vehicle
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
switch.
for further information.
4. Within 5 seconds, press and release either of the
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
Transmitter To Memory
Information Center (EVIC) will display which
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
memory position has been set.
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
must select the “Remote Linked to Memory” feature
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument
cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC.
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Undertransmitter within 10 seconds.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the followmemory settings by following steps 1-4 above and pressing:
ing the UNLOCK button (instead of LOCK) on the RKE
1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the transmitter in Step 4.
ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless
Memory Position Recall
Enter-N-Go).
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ for instruc- Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
tions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, driver’s mirror and
the pedals stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
before another recall can be selected.
memory switch , press MEMORY button number 1 on
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
the memory switch.
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF,
memory switch, press MEMORY button number 2 on for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
the memory switch.
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move about
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is
greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
position when you place the ignition into the ACC or Entry and Easy Exit position.
RUN position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move to a the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle
position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
driver seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (22.7 Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
will return to its previously set position when you further information.
place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left
and lift the hood.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
Safety Latch Location
Hood Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
further information.
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
System” and it is activated, the headlights will automatiWhen the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
approximately four minutes after the wipers completely
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers And Washers” in this
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
section for further information.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headNOTE: When your headlights come on during the daylights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
time, the instrument panel lights will automatically dim
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Lights” in this
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it section for further information.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
also has this customer-programmable feature. When SmartBeam™ — If Equipped
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
lighting at night by automating high beam control
the wiper system is on. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe- To Activate
cific light and automatically switches from high beams to
1. Enable the Automatic High Beams. Refer to “Eleclow beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerProgrammable Features” in “Understanding Your InNOTE:
strument Panel” for further information.
• If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is replaced,
the SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to ensure 2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
proper performance. See your local authorized dealer.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights 3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
and other obstructions (sticker, toll box, etc.) on the
at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
windshield or camera lens will cause the system to
function improperly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
To Deactivate
Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
Only
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
operation of low beams).
automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
reactivate the system.
Headlight Delay
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity) come on
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
used for normal nighttime driving.
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will not turn off The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center
on again when the turn signal is not operating.
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.
To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
Fog Light Operation
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odomthe headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
high beam is selected.
feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
Interior Lights
headlights are required during the day.
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to the its farthest upward position, or if equipped, when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. When a door is open and the
interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the
way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all the interior
lights to go out. This is also known as the “Party” mode
because it allows the doors to stay open for extended
periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
Dimmer Control
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lights-On Reminder
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when Front Map/Reading Lights
the driver’s door is opened.
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead console.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up
to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
pressed.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ambient Light
Multifunction Lever
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil- steering column.
ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area.
Multifunction Lever
Ambient Light
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Turn Signals
Flash-To-Pass
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steerproper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside High/Low Beam Switch
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
defective.
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located on the end of the lever. For information on the
rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Multifunction Lever
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
CAUTION! (Continued)
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Windshield Wiper Operation
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
(Continued)
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
Windshield Washer Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
cycles, then turn off.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
WARNING!
3
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
Mist Control
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windThis feature senses moisture on the windshield and
shield.
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray • Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings
• A customer programmable feature in the Electronic
to activate this feature.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
Sensing feature to be turned off. Refer to “Electronic
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandtive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper sensitivity. Setting 5 can be used if the driver
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
following conditions:
OFF position when not using the system.
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
NOTE:
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem- This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU- located below the steering wheel at the end of the
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not steering column.
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
Press the switch to turn on the heated
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
steering wheel. The light on the switch
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
will illuminate to indicate the steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
a second time will turn off the heated
approximately 30 to 95 minutes before automatically
steering wheel and light indicator.
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
steering wheel to operate.
warm.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
bank below the climate controls. There are also soft keys On models that are equipped with remote start, the
in the radio screen that will activate the heated steering heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
wheel.
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
WARNING!
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
3
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over 1 — ON/OFF
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph 4 — CANCEL
(32 km/h).
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
speed memory.
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
To Resume Speed
will be established.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Accelerate For Passing
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inPress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
To Deactivate
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
vehicle set speed.
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
moderate hills is normal.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
Control.
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
– Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
– Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
– Does not predict the lane curvature or the movement of preceding vehicles and will not compensate for such changes.
– Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
– Can only apply a maximum of 25% of the vehicle’s braking capability, and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode”
in this section.
NOTE: The system will not react to preceding vehicles.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
3
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
DISTANCE SETTING
RES +
SET CANCEL
ON/OFF
MODE
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension modifications to the ve- NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
hicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise conditions:
Control.
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When you apply the brakes.
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above
• When the parking brake is set.
18 mph (30 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) dis• When pushing the RES + button without a previously
set speed in memory.
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
To Activate
plays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
Push and release the ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in
the EVIC displays “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF
button again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
ACC Set
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
Driver Override
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS off,
The system will disable ACC without erasing the ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
memory if:
To Cancel
• You softly tap the brake pedal.
3
• You depress the brake pedal.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
• The speed of the vehicle goes below 15 mph
(25 km/h).
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• You push the ON/OFF button.
• You turn OFF the ignition.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume Speed
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
Press the RES + button and release. Then remove your To Vary The Speed Setting
foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
last set speed.
pressing and holding the RES + button. If the button is
NOTE: You can resume ACC from a minimum of continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the button is
18 mph (30 km/h).
released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC
display.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 1 mph • The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring the
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
vehicle to a complete stop.
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
pressing and holding the SET - button. If the button is
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to demoderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
crease in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the button is
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downreleased. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to mainEVIC display.
tain set speed.
Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph Setting The Following Distance In ACC
(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
varying the distance setting between 3 (long), 2 (meNOTE:
dium), and 1 (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC.
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 3
Distance Setting 2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph
(24 km/h) and the system automatically disengages
itself.
To change the distance setting, press the Distance button
and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance
• The distance setting is changed.
setting adjusts between long, medium, and short.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
ACC Activation).
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
Distance Setting 1
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how- provide an additional acceleration based on your current
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if speed. The acceleration is triggered by indicating a left
turn signal.
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately
apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle ahead.
The ACC Systems provides Overtake Aid when passing
on the left hand side only. When driving with ACC
engaged and following a Target vehicle, the system will
Brake Alert
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Press the MENU button (located on the steering wheel)
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The repeatedly until one of the following displays in the
EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument EVIC:
cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The Adaptive Cruise Control Off
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
– When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
Menu Button
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
– When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
ACC SET
– When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
– The set speed will continue to display in place of the
odometer reading when changing the EVIC display
while ACC is set.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
The ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
warning will display when conditions temporarily limit
The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC
system performance. This most often occurs at times of
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
• Set Speed Change
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the
• Distance Setting Change
EVIC will display “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” and the system will deactivate.
• System Cancel
Example Only
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
The “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” message
can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is
not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
3
Clean Radar Sensor Warning
NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should • Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
malfunction.
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
tant to note the following maintenance items:
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
simply reactivating it.
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
NOTE:
the sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so • If the “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
require a sensor realignment.
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your
• If the sensor is damaged due to a collision, see your
authorized dealer.
authorized dealer for service.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
NOTE: Do not change the adjustment fasteners or pull
the sensor off of the bracket. Doing so may misalign the
NOTE: When off-roading, it may be advisable to remove
sensor.
the ACC sensor. The sensor is located behind the front
lower grille in the center of the vehicle. After removing Store the sensor and bracket assembly in a safe location.
the lower fascia, you may remove the lower sensor and The wiring and connector must be stowed properly after
bracket assembly.
the sensor and bracket assembly is removed.
Removing ACC Sensor For Off-Roading
To remove the sensor follow these instructions:
A connector plug is stowed on top of the bumper beam.
Insert the wiring connector into the connector plug.
1. Unplug the connector by depressing the two tabs on
the connector and pulling it out. Do not pull by the NOTE: When the sensor is removed, Adaptive Cruise
wiring or use any tools to remove the connector.
Control, Normal Cruise Control, and Forward Collision
2. Remove the wiring christmas tree attachment from the Warning will not be available. The cluster will display the
warning “ACC/FCW Unavailable - Service Radar Senback of the bracket.
sor.”
3. Remove the two M6 fasteners that connect the bracket
To reinstall the sensor and bracket assembly reverse the
to the bumper.
process above. The fastener torque required to assembly
the bracket back to the beam is 6.6 ft lbs (9 N·m).
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ACC Unavailable Warning
Precautions While Driving With ACC
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Adding A Trailer Hitch
The weight of a trailer/hitch may affect the performance
of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance
Service ACC Warning
following the installation of a trailer/hitch, or if the ACC
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/ performance does not return to normal after removing
FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates the trailer/hitch see your authorized dealer.
there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
Offset Driving
Turns And Bends
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel. There will not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle
may move in and out of the line of travel, which can
cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
convenience reasons, with no target vehicle detected.
Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will
resume your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal
ACC system functionality.
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC will not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There will not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
General Information
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
Classification Specifications:
47 C.F.R. Part 15
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a normal
(fixed speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The normal Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To change between the different cruise modes, press the
MODE button when the system is in either the OFF,
READY or SET state. Pressing of the MODE button in any
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
state will result in changing to the new Mode in the OFF NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or
changing speed, not the speedometer.
state.
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
To Vary The Speed Setting
There are two ways to change the set speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the
desired speed and press the SET - button.
• Tap the RES + or SET - button to increase or decrease
the set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increments respectively. Hold the RES + or SET - button for 5 mph
(8 km/h) increments.
To Cancel
The system will disable normal Cruise Control without
erasing the memory if:
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press the
• You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
• You press the CANCEL button.
speed.
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides
the driver with audible and visual warnings (within the
To Resume
EVIC) when it detects a potential frontal collision. The
Press the RES + button and then remove your foot from
warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough
the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set
time to react and avoid the potential collision.
speed.
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
To Turn Off
sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC),
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in wheel speed sensors, i.e., to calculate a probable rear-end
memory if:
collision. When the system determines that a rear-end
collision is probable a warning message (both audible
• You push the ON/OFF button.
and visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. When the
• You turn off the ignition.
system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of
you is no longer probable, the warning message will be
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
deactivated.
If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated,
the system will return to the last driver setting (ACC or
Normal Cruise Control).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 10 mph
(16 km/h).
• When entering or driving in a curve, the FCW alerts
may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as
guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
WARNING!
FCW Message
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing FCW Status
The FCW feature can be set to far, set to near or turned off
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. The FCW Status Off, Near or Far will be
displayed in the EVIC.
FCW settings can only be changed when the vehicle is in
PARK.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
Example Only
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
gives you the most reaction time.
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
3
Example Only
Example Only
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system NOTE: In the “Off” setting FCW OFF will be displayed
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in the EVIC.
in front of you.
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher
rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the unavailable screens.
FCW Unavailable Warning
FCW Off Example
NOTE:
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating FCW again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
Service FCW Warning
driver after ignition shut down.
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
• FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over- FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
still drivable under normal conditions, have the system above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
checked by an authorized dealer.
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
ParkSense® Sensors
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
and audible indications of the distance between the rear bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System obstacles from approximately 18 in (45 cm) up to 79 in
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientarecommendations.
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is ParkSense® Warning Display
changed to the ON/RUN position.
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- ProREVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning Display is located in the Instrument cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
3
Park Assist System OFF
Park Assist System ON
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
3
Continuous Tone
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Radio Mute
No
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Yes
Yes
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2 Slow
Flashing
Yes
1 Slow
Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will MUTE the radio, if on, when the approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
system is sounding an audio tone.
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
ParkSense® switch.
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
When the ParkSense switch is pressed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
NOTE: The ParkSense® system will automatically disable when the system detects that a trailer with trailer
brakes has been connected to the Integrated Trailer Brake
Module. The EVIC will display “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in reverse.
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense
will not operate.
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in the
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure
ParkSense® is disabled or defective. The ParkSense® the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled.
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
System
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
When the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System is malEVIC, see an authorized dealer.
functioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the Cleaning The ParkSense® System
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damYour Instrument Panel” for further information. When age the sensors.
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• ParkSense®, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
• When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster
bumper.
will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off • Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
key.
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the EVIC will
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
the EVIC .
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operating properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense®
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
(Continued)
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones
EQUIPPED
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen distances for each zone:
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView® camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License
plate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
the “enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
Opener (HomeLink®), power liftgate and power sunroof
switches may also be included, if equipped.
5. Press the “save” soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
3
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartsecond time.
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
3
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
3
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink® NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
mitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. ReNOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes
vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to proTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
follow these steps:
view.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
button you want to program and the hand-held transthe indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
mitter button.
not release the button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programcator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
steps.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
from slow to rapid.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
before 1995.
and observe the indicator light.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
3
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transfollow these steps:
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do time-out in the same manner.
not release the button.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all door or gate motor.
remaining steps.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- programming, plug it back in at this time.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
fully trained.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
follow these steps:
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
door may open and close while you are programming.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
not release the button.
and observe the indicator light.
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Without releasing the button proceed with The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Troubleshooting Tips
Using HomeLink®
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
To operate, press and release the programmed here are some of the most common solutions:
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitprogrammed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operater.
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
also be used at any time.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
Security
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
in your vehicle.
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
3
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the
Accessory or On/Run position, for vehicles
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™). Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result
in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
the sunroof.
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
Opening Sunroof — Express
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obClosing Sunroof — Express
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucsecond and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
3
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind Buffeting
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Venting Sunroof — Express
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurand the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
Sunshade Operation
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Sunroof Maintenance
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is the glass panel.
open.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switches remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has
been turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView® sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
CommandView® Sunroof and Power Shade Switches
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the
Accessory or On/Run position, for vehicles
(Continued)
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™). Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result
in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati- full-open position. This is called “Express Open”. During
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express Express Open operation, any movement of the shade
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop switch will stop the shade.
the sunroof.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward .
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Opening Power Shade — Express
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Press and hold the shade switch
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
Press the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will open automatically Closing Power Shade — Express
from any position. The shade will open and stop auto- Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
matically at the half-open position. Press the shade second and the shade will close automatically from any
switch rearward again and release it within one-half
second and the shade will open automatically to the
3
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position. The shade will close fully and stop automati- sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruccally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop release to Express Close.
the shade.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, it will automatically close in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
during the ⬙Sun Shade Express Close⬙ movement.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
Pinch Protect Feature
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob- with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the minimize the buffeting or open any window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Sunroof Maintenance
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
the glass panel.
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
Ignition OFF Operation
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
The power sunroof switches can be programmed to “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Refer to “Elec- the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer- the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
Programmable Features (System Setup)” in “Under- to the battery and powered at all times.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
NOTE: Opening either front door will cancel this fea• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
ture.
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
Sunroof Fully Closed
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® knob and
element must be used.
3
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward
on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain
access to this power outlet.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
3
Center Console Outlet
Rear Power Outlet
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo NOTE: The rear power outlet can be switched to “batarea.
tery” powered all the time by switching the power outlet
right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel.
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
(Continued)
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
3
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Play- The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
most power tools.
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
Power Inverter
The power inverter switch is located
on the switch bank below the Climate
Controls. To turn on the power outlet,
press the switch once. Press the switch
a second time to turn the power outlet
off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
NOTE: When the power inverter switch is pressed, there CUPHOLDERS
will be a delay of approximately one second before the There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers
inverter status indicator turns ON. The status indicator of located in the center console.
the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is
producing AC power.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Front Cupholders
3
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers STORAGE
located in the fold-down center armrest.
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
Rear Cupholders
Glove Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the Door Storage
latch and lower the glove box door.
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
access.
3
Opened Glove Compartment
Door Panel Storage
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Center Console
The center console contains both an upper and a lower
storage area.
Storage Compartment Latches
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
Storage Compartment
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the lid.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
WARNING! (Continued)
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Lower Storage Compartment
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
(Continued)
3
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Press And Release
Three-Press Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
Two additional storage bins are located under the load
There are four removable storage bins located in the rear floor. To access the lower storage bins, raise the load floor
cargo area. There are two storage bins located on either and attach the tether hook (attached to the bottom of the
load floor) to the liftgate opening.
side of the cargo area.
Cargo Storage Bins
Rear Storage Bins
Tether Strap
3
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
Lower Storage Bins
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
Rear Cargo Cover
The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
3
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
(Continued)
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident,
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
3
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
the first detent for intermittent operation and to OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more
will activate the washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon
release of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper operation. When this rotary control is in
the OFF position, rotating it downward will activate the
rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long
as the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle
several times before returning to the parked position.
If the flipper glass is open, the rear window wiper/
washer functionality is interrupted and the wiper stops at
that “park” position. When the flipper glass is closed, the
rear wiper will resume wiper/washer functionality after
five seconds.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Press this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
switch is released the pump will resume normal opera- rear window defroster automatically turns off after aption.
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
CAUTION!
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
the heating elements:
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear dealer can order and install MOPAR® crossbars built
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
specifically for this roof rack system.
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
window cleaners on the interior surface of the exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
window.
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight
turns using the anti-theft wrench provided with the
MOPAR® crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the
3
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the
rack frame. Once the crossbar is in the desired position,
retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into
position.
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not
in use, place the front and rear crossbars approximately 24 in (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction
can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar
forward or aft using increments of 1 in (2.5 cm).
• If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For
improved satellite radio reception, avoid placing the
rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna.
• The grab handles on the back of the vehicle (if
equipped) are not to be used as a towing feature.
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do
not carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or some other protection between
the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .303
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . .331
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .305
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . .338
▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
▫ Turn Menu OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
▫ Tire PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped .340
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . .361
▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . .341 䡵 Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . . . .362
▫ Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
䡵 Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
䡵 Uconnect® 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .353
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .362
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . . .373
▫ INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . .373
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
▫ Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED .379
MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Notes on Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
▫ Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Important Notes For Single Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio . . .395
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ VES Remote Control – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .398
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
䡵 UCONNECT® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — If
Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .402
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Single Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .404
▫ Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .426
䡵 HARMAN KARDON® HIGH PERFORMANCE
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .426
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
SURROUND (DSS) – IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .424
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
6 — Lower Switch Bank
7 — Hazard Switch
8 — Storage Bin
9 — ESC Button
10 — Ignition Switch
11 — Hood Release
12 — Fuel Door Release
13 — Headlight Switch
14 — Dimmer Control
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the
1. Tachometer
ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/
(RPM x 1000).
RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
2. Air Bag Warning Light
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
not require towing.
on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
CAUTION!
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
3. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
(Continued)
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
4. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
6. Turn Signal Indicator
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn sigActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
nals when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned will chime, and an EVIC message will appear if either
to ON/RUN.
turn signal is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
5. TOW/HAUL Indicator Light — If Equipped
7. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
8. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
9. Hill Descent Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
The symbol indicates the status of the Hill
This light will illuminate when the TOW/
Decent Control (HDC) feature. The lamp will
HAUL button has been selected. The TOW/
be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
HAUL button is located in the center of the
be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD
instrument panel (below the climate controls). Low” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempt- that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
ing to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator lamp will must be reset at zero.
flash on/off.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
10. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Display/Odometer Display
Center”.
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve11. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
hicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
to continue to function properly.
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(Continued)
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check,
if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver or
front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
14. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
12. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
This indicator will illuminate when the park
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
lights or headlights are turned on.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
When the ignition switch is first turned to the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
13. Seat Belt Reminder Light
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesSystem (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. sary.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
WARNING!
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
dropped below a specified level.
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditurning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apthe brake fluid level checked.
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
inspected by an authorized dealer.
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is 16. Speedometer
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. Indicates vehicle speed.
15. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
17. Sport Mode
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
This light will illuminate when the sport mode
or track mode is selected. These modes provide
performance based tuning with improved handling and acceleration through an electronic
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it controlled dampening system. This system reduces body
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system roll and pitch in many driving situations including
is not functioning and that service is required. However, cornering, acceleration and braking.
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
18. Fuel Door Reminder
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
19. Fuel Gauge
21. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Amber
Telltale Area
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable amber
caution telltales. For further information, refer to “Electronic vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
22. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Red
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when Telltale Area
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable red tell20. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) White
tales. For further information, refer to “Electronic vehicle
Telltale Area
Information Center (EVIC)”.
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable white 23. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
telltales. For further information, refer to “Electronic Light — If Equipped
vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
24. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
ignition is first turned on.
25. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
WARNING! (Continued)
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
4
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
The EVIC consists of the following:
• Fuel Economy
• ACC: (If Equipped)
• Vehicle Speed
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Trip Info
• Tire PSI: (If Equipped)
• Vehicle Info
• Messages
• UNITS: SETTING
• System Setup
• Turn Menu Off
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
UP Button
Press and release the UP button to scroll upward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units,
System Setup, Vehicle Speed, Trip Info, Turn
Menu Off and sub-menus.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
DOWN Button
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and The EVIC display consists of three sections:
sub-menus.
1. The top line where compass direction, odometer line
and outside temperature are displayed.
SELECT Button
features.
Press and release the SELECT button for access 2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
messages are displayed.
to main menus, sub-menus or to select a personal setting in the setup menu. Press and hold 3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odomthe SELECT button for two seconds to reset
eter line.
BACK Button
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
previous menu or sub-menu.
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in
the EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are”Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out”
and “Low Tire Pressure”.
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
• Five Second Unstored
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Ex- • Service Keyless System (refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
amples of this message type are “Memory System UnPassive Entry - if equipped)
available - Not in Park” and “Automatic High Beams
• Service Park Assist System
On”.
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the • Park Assist System Blinded
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the •
middle, and red telltales on the left.
•
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
•
the following messages:
•
• Vehicle Not in Park
Park Assist Disabled
Keyfob Battery Low
Liftglass Open
Left front turn signal lamp out
• Key Left Vehicle
• Right front turn signal lamp out
• Key Not Detected
• Left rear turn signal lamp out
• Service TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor- • Right rear turn signal lamp out
ing System” in “Starting And Operating”)
• Low Tire Pressure
• Premium TPM System Graphic Display
• ESC System Off
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Service blind spot system
• Blind spot detection unavailable
• Blind spot system off
• Blind spot system unavailable sensor blocked
• ACC Set — After setting the desired speed in the ACC
system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if
equipped).
• ACC Cancelled — To disable the ACC system. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
• Normal Cruise Ready — When Adaptive Cruise ConThe Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
trol (ACC) system is turned off and Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control mode is available. Refer to • Sensed Vehicle Indicator — The system detects a
slower moving vehicle in the same lane. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Adaptive Cruise Off — When the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system is turned off. Refer to “Adaptive • Driver Override — If you apply the accelerator after
setting the desired speed in the ACC system. Refer to
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• ACC Ready — When the ACC system is activated.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Under- • Distance Set — After changing the desired following
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
distance in the ACC system, this message will display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
momentarily. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control • ACC/FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error — If the
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your VeACC system turns off due to a temporary malfunction
that limits functionality. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
hicle” (if equipped).
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
• Brake — If the ACC system predicts that its maximum
Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set
distance, this message will flash and a chime will • ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor — If the
ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
braking capacity. When this occurs, you should immethat requires service from an authorized dealer. Refer
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanddiately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
distance from the vehicle ahead. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Fea• Cruise Off When Park Brake is On
tures Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• ACC Cancelled Below Min. Speed.
• Clean Radar Sensor in the Front of Vehicle — If the
ACC system deactivates due to performance limiting • Coolant low
conditions. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)”
• Service air suspension system
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if
equipped).
• Oil change due
• Key in ignition
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Lights on
• Remote start active — Push Start Button
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Memory 1 profile set
• Ignition or Accessory On
• Memory 2 profile set
• Ignition or Accessory On Lights On
• Memory system unavailable — Not in Park
• Turn signal on
• Memory system unavailable — Seatbelt buckled
• Park assist on
• Memory 1 profile recall
• Warning object detected
• Memory 2 profile recall
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
• Wrong Key
• Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
• Damaged Key
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low
• Key not programmed
• Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
• Function currently unavailable — Power Liftgate
• Remote start active — Insert Key and Turn to Run
• Unlock to operate — Power Liftgate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
• Put in Park to operate — Power Liftgate
• Automatic high beams on
• Automatic high beams off
• Service Four Wheel Drive System
• To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
Owners Manual
• For 4x4 Low Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans in
N Press 4 Low
• ECO — Fuel Saver Indicator
• For 4x4 High Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans
in N Press 4 Low
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — AUTOMATIC
• Terrain System Settings Not Available
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — TOW
• Raising Vehicle Ride Height (with icon)
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — TRACK
• Lowering Vehicle Ride Height (with icon)
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — SNOW
• Normal Vehicle Ride Height — This message is displayed (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle has achieved
the Normal Vehicle Ride Height.
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — SPORT
• Sport Not Available in 4 Low 4 High is Required
• Rock Not Available in 4 Low 4 High is Required
• Off Road Ride Height Level 1 — This message is
displayed (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle has
achieved the Off Road Height Level 1.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Off Road Ride Height Level 2 — This message is
displayed (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle has
achieved the Off Road Height Level 2.
• Vehicle Lowered To Entry/Exit (Park) Height — This
message is displayed (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle
has achieved the Park Height.
system which results in a complete system shutdown.
The system will be non operational at that point.
• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height —
This message is displayed in advance warning to the
driver that the vehicle will be moved to the next lower
preset position unless the speed is reduced.
• Entry/Exit (Park) Height in Progress — This message • Selected Ride Height Not Permitted — The vehicle
speed is too high to enter one of the preset levels
is displayed (for 5 seconds) when the request is made
(Entry/Exit Level/Off Road Ride Height Level 1/Off
to go into Entry/Exit Height while the vehicle speed is
Road Ride Height Level 2).
between 15 and 25 mph. This shows that the request
has been recognized and will lower to Entry/Exit
• Air Suspension System Cooling Down – Please Wait —
height when vehicle is below 15 mph.
This message is displayed if the compressor tempera• Service Air Suspension System — This is displayed
ture level is too high. Level control is suspended until
the compressor has cooled down.
when a fault has occurred in the system. The system
will have limited operation at that point.
• Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered – Door Open — This
• Immediate Air Suspension Service/Repair Required
message is displayed if a door or the liftgate is ajar and
level control is suspended.
— This is displayed when a fault has occurred in the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
• Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And • Electronic Speed Control ON
Tire Change
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
• Aerodynamic Ride Height — This is displayed (for 5
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Underseconds) when the vehicle has achieved the Aerodystanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
namic Height.
• Performance Features
EVIC White Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Shift Lever Status
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed
indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1”
indicate the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has
been engaged and the gear selected is displayed. For
further information on ERS, refer to “Starting And Operating”.
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON
This light will turn on when the ACC is ON.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET
cool and return to normal operation. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further
This light will turn on when the ACC is SET.
information.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The NOTE:
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera• Power Steering System Over Temperature — If
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
Equipped
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER
and during parking maneuvers.
TEMP” message and a icon are displayed on
the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme steer- • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
ing maneuvers may have occurred, which
service.
caused an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
over and let vehicle idle. After 5 minutes, the system will
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
• Air Suspension Down
The air suspension down telltale will illuminate when the air suspension is in use. For
further information, refer to “Starting And
Operating”.
This light warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front and prompts the • Low Fuel Light
driver to take action in order to avoid the
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
collision. For further information, refer to
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding fuel is added.
The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
• Air Suspension Up
This light will turn on to indicate the windThe air suspension up telltale will illuminate
shield washer fluid is low.
when the air suspension is in use. For further
information, refer to “Starting And Operating”.
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• SERV 4WD
• Liftgate Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift
may be ajar.
4WD system. If the SERV 4WD light stays on or
comes on during driving, it means that the
4WD system is not functioning properly and
• Liftgate Flipper Glass Ajar
that service is required.
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
EVIC Red Telltale Lights
flipper glass may be ajar.
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
• Door Ajar
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If
This light will turn on to indicate that one or the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
more doors may be ajar.
off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for
four minutes when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
require towing.
This light informs you of a problem with the
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
This light warns of an overheated engine condilight will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous light goes off.
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
ON/ RUN position (Do not start the engine).
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
within 10 seconds.
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
OFF/LOCK position.
upon your personal driving style.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (Do
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
not start the engine).
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the MENU but- 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
ton. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol- 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
lowing procedure.
Oil Change Due
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you The Trip Functions mode displays the following informastart the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not tion:
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode — If
Fuel Economy
Equipped
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
the SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN
buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy functions displays in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the
average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
will appear whenever the Multi-Displacement System
(MDS) (if equipped) allows the engine to operate on four
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
cylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner.
Trip Computer functions.
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
Fuel Saver Mode — On
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Speed
• Elapsed Time
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display the
current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT
button a second time will toggle the unit of measure
between mph or km/h.
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
Trip Computer functions. The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the Trip B
EVIC.
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Trip Info
This feature allows you to track the total distance traveled since the last reset and the elapsed time of travel.
Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
• Trip A
• Trip B
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
To Reset The Display
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
available information displays, then press SELECT to
display any one of the following choices.
Units
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT
button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Performance Features
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the performance pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
can jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
This light will illuminate when the sport mode
is selected. This mode provides performance
based tuning with improved handling through
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
an electronic controlled damping system. This system
reduces body roll and pitch in many driving situations
including cornering, acceleration and braking. For further information, refer to ”Sport Mode” in “Starting And
Operating”.
The Performance Features include the following:
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
• Braking Distance
• 1/8 Mile
• 1/4 Mile
• Instantaneous G-Force
• Peak G-Force
• Digital Speedometer
To access, press and release either the UP or DOWN
arrow button until “Performance Features” appears in
the EVIC, then press and release the SELECT button.
Press the UP or DOWN button to cycle through the
features. Press the SELECT button to select a feature.
The following describes each feature and its operation:
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph
(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
• The time will continue to display until the SELECT
button is pressed.
• Pressing the SELECT button will clear the current run
time and display the vehicle’s best 0-60 mph
(0-100 km/h) time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
• To clear the vehicle’s best 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time, • The distance and speed measurements will continue to
press and hold the SELECT button for five seconds.
display until the SELECT button is pressed.
• Pressing the SELECT button will clear the current run
and prepare the cluster to record a new run.
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was 1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile
depressed.
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
• This feature will only function when applying the vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 30 seconds
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
and the vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile (1/ 4
mile).
• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph
• The word “READY” will flash when conditions are
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condimet for the event to begin.
tions are met for the event to begin.
• The distance and speed measurements display while
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8
the event is taking place.
mile (1/4 mile) in less then 30 seconds.
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
• The time and speed will continue to display until the
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a comSELECT button is pressed.
plete stop.
Braking Distance
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Pressing the SELECT button will clear the current run Digital Speedometer
and display the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) run. When selected, this screen displays vehicle speed and
• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) run, records top speed.
press and hold the SELECT button for five seconds.
• Press and hold the SELECT button for three seconds to
Instantaneous G-Force
toggle between current speed and top speed.
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force • To reset top speed, quickly press and release the
(lateral and longitudinal) along with a friction circle that
SELECT button when top speed is displayed.
displays the directions of the forces.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Peak G-Force
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
values (two lateral and two longitudinal).
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
• When a force greater than zero is measured, the available information displays, then press SELECT to
display will update the value as it climbs. As the display any one of the following choices.
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display. • Coolant Temp
• Pressing the SELECT button will clear the peak force Displays the actual coolant temperature.
values.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Trans Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
• Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
than one message to step through the remaining stored
messages. Pressing the BACK button takes you back to
the Main Menu.
Turn Menu OFF
Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button. Pressing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pressing
any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the
menu back.
Tire PSI
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire
PSI” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons. SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN butThis feature shows the number of stored warning mes- tons until one of the following System Status messages
sages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button displays in the EVIC:
will allow you to see what the stored messages are. Press • System OK
and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more
• System Warnings Displayed (will display all currently
active System Warnings)
Messages #
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (shows the current pres- NOTE:
sure of all four road tires). For additional information,
• Tires heat up during normal driving conditions. Heat
refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor System” in “Starting
will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi
And Operating”.
(14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Refer
to “Tires-General Information/Tire Inflation Pressures” in “Starting And Operating” for additional
information.
• Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
kPa, or BAR.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped
Tire Pressure Display
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Enter-NGo™ icon momentarily appears in the lower right corner
of the EVIC display showing the new ignition switch
position.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Starting And Oper- Automatic Compass Calibration
ating” for more information.
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
superseded by another display of higher priority. But new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
when the ignition switch position is changed, the display display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
always re-appears.
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
Compass / Temperature Display
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
readings and the outside temperature.
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to etc.
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Compass Variance Map
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
then press the SELECT button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance” 1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
SELECT button. The last variance zone number dis(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
plays in the EVIC.
then press the SELECT button.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
displayed in the EVIC.
5. Press and release the BACK button to exit.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in
Manual Compass Calibration
the EVIC.
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the 5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
“CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now
NOTE: For the most accurate compass performance, the
function normally.
compass variance must be set before performing the
manual compass calibration. The variance should be set
for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone
map. For further information, refer to “Compass Variance.”
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français),
Italian (Italiano), German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Nederlands). Then, as you continue, the information will disPersonal Settings allows you to set and recall features
play in the selected language.
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning Nav–Turn By Turn
message SETUP NOT AVAILABLE, is followed in 3
When this feature is selected, the navigation system
seconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Setup route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destinadisplays in the EVIC.
tion is reached. To make your selection, press and release
Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
following choices.
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
Select Language
deactivated.
When in this display you may select one of five lan- Auto Unlock Doors
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
through the language choices. Press the SELECT button PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
Customer-Programmable Features (System
Setup)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated, or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Remote Unlock Sequence
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to
Unlock All Doors 1st Press, all doors will unlock no
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only
the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is
programmed touching the handle more than once will
only result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door
first is selected, once the driver door is opened, the
interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock
all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
RKE Linked To Memory
When this feature is selected, you can use your RKE
transmitter to recall one of two pre-programmed memory
profiles. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals
(if equipped), power tilt and telescopic steering column
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(if equipped), and a set of desired radio station presets.
When OFF is selected, only the MEMORY switch on the
driver’s door trim panel will recall memory profiles. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button a check-mark appears next to the feature showing
the system has been activated or the check-mark is
removed showing the system has been deactivated. Refer
to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Horn With Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
This feature may be selected with or without the “Flash
Lamps with Lock” feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark apRemote Start Comfort Sys.
pears next to the feature showing the system has been
When this feature is selected and the remote start is activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated system has been deactivated.
seat features will automatically turn on when temperaHorn With Remote Start
tures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are
above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on. When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
These features will stay on through the duration of occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
feature showing the system has been activated or the then press and release the SELECT button until a checkcheck-mark is removed showing the system has been mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
has been selected.
deactivated.
Flash Lamps With Lock
Headlamps With Wipers (Available with Automatic
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn Headlamps Only)
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on apwith or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
Headlamp Off Delay
showing the system has been deactivated.
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat
Only)
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been Key-Off Power Delay
deactivated.
When this feature is selected, the power window
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
Tilt Mirror In Reverse
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
When this feature is selected, the outside rearview mir- until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
rors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the that the setting has been selected.
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Illuminated Approach
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing Auto High Beams (Available with SmartBeam™
that the setting has been selected.
Only)
Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
Temperature display; this message can be turned on or
off. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that the setting has been selected.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry)
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
When this feature is selected, the system will automatideactivated.
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press and Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
Alert. By pressing and releasing the SELECT button once,
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
the Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Blind
been deactivated. When this feature is deactivated, the
Spot: Lights Only” mode. When this mode is selected the
system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operaBlind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will
tion.
only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. By
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
pressing and releasing the SELECT button a second time
When this feature is selected, the HSA system is active. “Blind Spot: Lights/CHM” mode is activated. In this
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting mode the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual
And Operating” for system function and operating infor- alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert
mation. To make your selection, press and release the when the turn signal is on. When “Blind Spot: Off” is
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the selected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
Wiper Mode — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can
be set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status
of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will
warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you when you are farther away. This gives you the
most reaction time. To change the setting for more
dynamic driving select the Near setting. This warns you
of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you
when you are much closer. This allows for a more
dynamic driving experience. To change FCW status press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
For further information, refer to ”Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
Park Assist System — If Equipped
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only
or Sound and Display. To make your selection, scroll up
or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
been selected. Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — If
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sys- Equipped
tem function and operating information.
Refer to your Uconnect® 730N, 430 or 430N user’s
manual for detailed operating instructions.
Display Units Of Measure In:
The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect® gps (if equipped) Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
can be changed between English and Metric units of — If Equipped
measure. To make your selection, press and release the Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Calibrate Compass
Equipped
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Uconnect® 130
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect® 130
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
position to operate the radio.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
another selection. Holding either button will bypass 5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
stations without stopping, until you release it.
RW/FF
TIME Button
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
and radio frequency.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Clock Setting Procedure
TUNE Control
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
SCROLL control knob.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
will begin to blink.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Memory
treble tones.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
the front and rear speakers.
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
button number will display.
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
Buttons 1 - 6
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
stations).
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
DISC Button
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD and MP3 modes.
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
TIME Button
change of pace.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or Play.
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) Notes on Playing MP3 Files
button works in a similar manner.
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
AM/FM Button
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricPress the button to select either AM or FM mode.
tions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
Layer
3
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
VBR bit rate.
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
Playback of MP3 Files
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
by the following:
MP3 player, or iPOD®, and utilize the vehicle’s audio
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
system to amplify the source and play through the
CD-R media
vehicle speakers.
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
to load than non-multisession discs
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
time to turn off the radio.
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Electronic Volume Control
Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone — If
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 Equipped
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further
volume, and to the left decreases it.
details.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
set at the same volume level as last played.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
SEEK Buttons
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next screen.
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch TIME Button
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
and radio frequency.
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
procedure, starting at Step 2.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
INFO Button
SCROLL control knob.
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
will begin to blink.
RW/FF
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con- Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
trol knob to save time change.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. AM or FM frequencies.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. TUNE Control
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
treble tones.
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
16-Digit Character Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Program Type
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character Display
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL conBy pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
trol knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
save time change.
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
AM/FM Button
mode.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
button number will display.
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Buttons 1 - 6
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
stations).
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
DISC/AUX Button
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD and MP3 modes.
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
TIME Button
change of pace.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ranbegin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or dom Play.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button Notes On Playing MP3 Files
works in a similar manner.
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
AM/FM Button
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricPress the button to select either AM or FM mode.
tions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
Layer
3
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
VBR bit rates.
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Playback of MP3 Files
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
by the following:
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
CD-R media
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will The folder list will time out after five seconds.
increase with more files and folders
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
time⬙ priority mode.
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
down.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which ignition is OFF).
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle’s audio Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
system to amplify the source and play through the Equipped
vehicle speakers.
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil- Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil- Number (ESN/SID)
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. Please have the following information available when
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has calling:
limited coverage in Alaska.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selecting Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
mode.
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects Operating Instructions - Uconnect® Multimedia
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause (Satellite) Mode
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly ACC position to operate the radio.
on or above the antenna.
SEEK Buttons
Satellite Antenna
Reception Quality
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
following reasons:
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
structure or under a physical obstacle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
SCAN Button
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con- to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
MUSIC TYPE Button
button a second time.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
INFO Button
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa- or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail- seconds will allow the program format type to be seable). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an lected.
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
type.
to normal display).
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
RW/FF
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons channel with the same selected Music Type name.
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
direction of the arrows.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to button number will display.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. Buttons 1 - 6
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
or glove compartment.
which is located in the center console or glove compartment.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect® radio User’s Manual for iPod® or external
USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod® /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The center console will have a position where the
iPod® or consumer electronic audio device cable can be
routed through without damaging the cable when closing the lid. A factory cut out space for the cable to be
routed may be located in the base of the center console on
either the front or side. This allows routing of the cable
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
not available in the center console base, route the cable
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the
lid to close without damaging the cable.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
USB port:
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
etc.) information on the radio display.
the vehicle’s iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
pressing radio switches, as described below.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and
access a connected audio device, either press the “AUX”
button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and
say ⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
Play Mode
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of the
current track.
When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play
holding the FF>> button.
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external • A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will
USB device and display data:
jump backward or forward respectively, for five seconds.
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK>> button
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
Track⬙.
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
<< SEEK and SEEK>> buttons will select the previous
and next tracks.
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see • RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/MP3 de- audio device.
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
each track in the current list and then forward to the
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
device or external USB device.
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
played is highlighted on the radio display, press the
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
list on the top line and the first item in that list on the
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
second line.
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight
•
To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
delay in updating the information on the radio
same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
display may be noticeable.
• During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom • LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod® or external USB device. Turn
of the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterthe TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
clockwise) to get to the track faster.
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
external USB device.
track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device
• Preset 1 – Playlists
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect® phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Streaming Audio”.
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect®
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
Previous Track
Selecting Different Audio Device
Browse
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
previous track music on your cellular phone.
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say current song that is playing will display info.
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
UCONNECT® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — If
Uconnect® phone system to list audio devices.
Equipped
Next Track
Getting Started
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the • Screen located in the overhead console: Unfold the
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
overhead LCD screen by pushing the button in the
music on your cellular phone.
center of the overhead console behind the screen.
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• When the Video Screen are open and a DVD is inserted
into the VES™ player, the screen turns on automatically, the headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.
Single Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES)™.
• The Remote Control
• The Touch-Screen Radio (If Equipped)
Overhead Video Screen
Play A DVD
• With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position, 1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the
turn the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume
radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).
Control knob.
Or
Press the LOAD button then corresponding number (1–6)
where the DVD is to be loaded (Non-Touch-Screen).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
3. Ensure the VES™ Remote Control and the Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
4
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Screen 1, highlight DISC by either
pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER.
Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list appears on the right side of
the screen, touch the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the
Rear VES Controls screen.
Rear VES Soft-Key
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
3. Touch the 1 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in the
MEDIA column. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key
at the top left of the screen.
NOTE: The “1” and “2” soft-keys are displayed for the
headphone channels. Touch 1 or 2 based on which
channel you want to change, select the new mode from
the available list on the right. Modes that are unavailable
are greyed-out.
4
Select Channel/Screen 1 And DISC In The MEDIA
Column
NOTE:
• To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner
will turn off the remote control screen functions.
Play Video Games
1. Video In – Yellow
2. Left Audio In – White
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA 3. Right Audio In – Red
input jacks located on the back of the center console.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™
jacks:
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more
information.
4
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX 1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
1, by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
ENTER on the Remote Control.
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear VES Soft-Key
3. Touch the 1 soft-key and then touch AUX 1 in the VES
column. To exit press the back arrow soft-key at the
top of the screen.
Select Channel/Screen 1 And AUX 1 In The VES
Column
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE/SOURCE button on the Remote
Control and the Mode Select Screen will display,
unless a video is playing then only a small banner will
appear on the bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Select FM Mode On The VES Screen
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
the desired audio source or repeatedly press the Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
MODE/SOURCE button on the remote until the de1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
sired audio source appears on the screen.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
4
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear VES Soft-Key
3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a
video is playing on Channel 1, touch the 2 soft-key and
choose an audio source. To exit touch the back arrow
soft-key at the top left of the left screen.
Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD In The Media
Column
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Important Notes For Single Video Screen System
Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio
• VES™ is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio 1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the
simultaneously.
radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1 2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
and right side equates to Channel 2.
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
• If a video source is selected on Channel 1, then
starts playing the first track.
Channel 2 is for audio only. Selecting a video source
(DVD) will not show the video on the screen.
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
• When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
switch is on Channel 1.
will display on the screen and the audio could be
Using The Remote Control
heard on Channel 1 in the headphones.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even 1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
when the Video Screen is closed.
2. While looking at Screen 1, highlight DISC by either
pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER.
4
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
NOTE:
• To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in
tions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
the MEDIA column. To exit touch the back arrow at
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner
the top left of the screen.
will turn off the remote control screen functions.
Rear VES Soft-key
4
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
VES Remote Control – If Equipped
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after
five seconds.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position,
the remote controls the functionality of screen Channel
1 (right side of the screen). When the selector switch is
Remote Control
in the Channel 2, position the remote controls the
Controls And Indicators
functionality of screen Channel 2 (left side of the
screen).
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable 10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode,
station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward
pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in
through the current audio track or video chapter. In
the radio. When listening to compressed audio on a
satellite video mode, press to advance to the next
data disc, PROG Up selects the next directory and
channel. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
PROG Down selects the previous directory. When
6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the
listening to a disc in a radio with a multiple-disc
previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to
changer, PROG Up selects the next disc and PROG
the start of the current or previous audio track or
Down selects the previous disc.
video chapter. In satellite video mode, press to advance to the previous channel. In menu modes, use to 11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output
navigate in the menu.
for the selected channel.
7. MENU – Press to return to the main menu of a DVD 12. SLOW – Press to slow playback of a DVD disc. Press
play (䉴) to resume normal play.
disc, to select a satellite audio or video channel from
the Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/
13. STATUS – Press to display the current status.
RANDOM for a CD).
14. MODE – Press to change the mode of the selected
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this
9. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play.
manual for details on changing modes.
4
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP
rewind through the current audio track or video
button to access the display settings (see the display
chapter. In satellite video mode, press to advance to
settings section) or the DVD Setup menu. When a
the previous channel. In menu modes use to navigate
disc is loaded in the DVD player (if equipped) and
in the menu.
the VES™ mode is selected and the disc is stopped,
18. ENTER – Press to select the highlighted option in a
press the SETUP button to access the DVD Setup
menu.
menu. (see the DVD Setup Menu of this manual.)
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to
next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the
return to the previous screen. When navigating a
next audio track or video chapter. In satellite video
DVDs disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s
mode, press to advance to the next channel. In menu
contents.
modes, use to navigate in the menu.
17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous
tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
Remote Control Storage
The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compartment for the remote control which is accessible when the
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the
two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
4
The Remote Control Storage
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
• To disable the Remote Control from making any
changes, press the Video Lock button on the DVD
player (if equipped). If the vehicle is not equipped
with a DVD player, follow the radio’s instructions to
turn Video Lock on. The radio and the video screen(s)
indicate when Video Lock is active.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
• Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition do so for themselves.
OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
operation of the VES™.
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
position and that the channel is not muted and the
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op- headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
eration. To replace the batteries:
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
• Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1.
2.
3.
4.
Volume Control
Power Button
Channel Selection Switch
Power Indicator
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone
selector switch.
4
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
gate to the available modes and press the OK button to
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned
select the new mode.
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
NOTE:
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is 5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the
BACK button on the remote control.
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
2. Press the MODE/SOURCE button on the remote Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
control.
operation. To replace the batteries:
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such • Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
as a DVD Video), pressing DISPLAY shows the status
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen.
downward.
Pressing the MODE/SOURCE button will advance to
the next mode. When the mode is in an audio only • Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
source (such as FM), the Mode Selection menu appears
on screen.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
What Will Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired® reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireless headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferable.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
as long as you own the Product.
4
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
the same (shared) mode, a VES™ icon will be visible on
the radio’s display and the shared icon will be visible on
the VES™ screen. When in shared mode, the same audio
source is heard in the headphones and vehicle speakers
simultaneously.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired® wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293- If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared
3332
or
email mode with the VES™, only the radio is able to control the
[email protected]
radio functions. In this case, VES™ can share the radio
You may register your Unwired® wireless headphones mode, but not change stations until the radio mode is
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at changed to a mode that is different from the VES™
selected radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority
1-888-293-3332.
over the VES™ or all radio modes (FM, AM, and SAT).
System Information
The VES™ has the ability to switch tuner (AM/FM),
SEEK, SCAN, TUNE, and recall presets in radio modes as
Shared Modes
long as it is not in shared mode.
The VES™ and radio are capable of communicating with
each other. This allows the VES™ to output radio audio
to the headphones and the radio to output VES™ audio
to the vehicle speakers. When the radio and VES™ are in
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
When in shared disc or satellite video mode both the Information Mode Display
radio and the VES™ have control of the video functions.
The VES™ has the ability to control the following video
modes:
1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track
Up/Down.
4
2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk Up/Down and
program all listed CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind,
Scan, and Track Up/Down).
The VES™ can even control radio modes or video modes
while the radio is turned off. The VES™ can access the
radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes
on the VES™ and activating a radio mode or disc mode.
Information Mode Video Screen Display
When information mode is active, the current mode
setting for both audio channels is displayed. In addition
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to the items called out by number, the remaining infor- 5. Channel 2 Shared Status – When the icon is displayed,
mation displays the current status of the source (such as
the audio for Channel 2 is also shared with the radio
station frequency, name, preset or track number, song
and playing through the cabin speakers.
title, artist name, album name, etc.).
6. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute – Audio: Only in a single
1. Channel 1 Mode – Displays the current source for
screen system: The audio only icon is displayed on
Channel 1.
Channel 2 when Channel 1 is in a video mode. Mute:
when the Mute icon is displayed, the audio for Chan2. Channel 1 Shared Status – When the icon is displayed,
nel 2 has been muted using the remote control’s
the audio for Channel 1 is also shared with the radio
MUTE button.
and playing through the cabin speakers.
7. Channel 1 ENTER Button Action – When the ENTER
3. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute - Audio: The audio only
button on the remote control is pressed with the
icon is not used on Channel 1, in a single screen
⬙INPUT FILE #⬙ button visible on the screen, the screen
system. Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the
shows a numeric entry keypad which allows you to
audio for Channel 1 has been muted using the remote
enter a specific track number on data discs and HDD
control’s MUTE button.
(see Numeric Keypad Menu section of this manual).
Also, Enter Button Action – “INPUT TRK #” to enter a
4. Channel 2 Mode – Displays the current source for
specific track number on audio discs.
Channel 2.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
8. Channel 2 ENTER Button Action – When the ENTER Mode Selection Menu
button on the remote control is pressed with the
⬙DIRECT TUNE⬙ button visible on the screen, the
screen shows a numeric entry keypad which allows
you to enter a specific tuner frequency, or tuner
channel for AM/FM/MW/LW (see Numeric Keypad
Menu section).
9. Clock – Displays the time.
10. Video Lock – When the icon is displayed, the remote
control functions are disabled.
11. Not Available / Error – Operational or status errors
are displayed here.
Mode Selection Menu
12. Disc Changer Status – When the source for either
Channel 1 or Channel 2 is a multi-disc changer, the The first press of the MODE button causes the Mode
disc loaded / selected status is displayed.
Selection menu to appear on screen. The current mode is
4
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
always the default selection. The mode can be changed Numeric Keypad Menu
for either Channel/Screen 1 or Channel/Screen 2 using
the remote control.
Use the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲, 䉴, 䉳)
to navigate through the available modes, and then press
the remote control’s ENTER button to select the mode.
An alternate method of changing modes is repeated
pressing of the MODE button until the desired mode is
highlighted then press the ENTER button on the remote
control to select the mode.
In a single screen system, when a video mode (such as
DVD-video, Aux video, etc.) is active and Channel/
Screen 1 is selected using the remote control selector
Numeric Keypad Menu
switch, the first press of the remote control’s MODE
button causes the Mode Selection menu to appear.
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s
ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu. This
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency, Station List Menu
satellite channel, or track number. To enter the desired When listening to Satellite audio, pressing the remote
digit:
control’s MENU button displays a list of all available
1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲, channels. Navigate this list using the remote control’s
navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to find the desired station,
䉴, 䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
press the remote control’s ENTER button to tune to that
2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote con- station. To jump through the list more quickly, navigate
trol’s ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these to the Page Up and Page Down icons on the screen.
steps until all digits are entered.
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and
press the remote control’s ENTER button.
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and press the remote control’s ENTER button.
4
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
commands which control playback of the disc. Using the
options you can activate or cancel Scan play and Random
play.
Disc Menu
Display Settings
Disc Menu For CDs
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
the remote control’s MENU button displays a list of all
Video Screen Display Settings
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, SIRIUS Backseat TV™, etc.),
pressing the remote control’s SETUP button activates the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
Display Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen. The factory default
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is
no need to change these settings under normal circumstances.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
To change the settings, press the remote control’s navi- • Close the video screen.
gation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then press the • To change the current audio mode, press the remote
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
control’s MODE/SOURCE button. This will automativalue for the currently selected item. To reset all values
cally select the next available audio mode without
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
using the Mode/Source Select menu.
menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
button.
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
Disc Features control the remote DVD player’s (if
display menu or media.
equipped) settings of DVD being watched in the remote
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
player.
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press
4
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If • BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1),
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
are installed in the headphones.
DVD-VR
Disc Formats
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
The VES™ DVD player is capable of playing the follow• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6)
ing types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter):
profile 3.0
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
DVD Region Codes
notes about DVD Region Codes)
The VES™ DVD player and many DVD discs are coded
• DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only)
by geographic region. These region codes must match in
• Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio disc does not match the region code for the player, the
disc will not play and will be ejected.
format files
DVD Audio Support
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the VES™ DVD
The Blu-Ray player is capable of the playing the followplayer, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
ing types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter):
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
the disc or to another mode.
Recorded Discs
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines when recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CDAudio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
The VES™ DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or resupported.
corded) are not supported.
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
be cases where the VES™ DVD player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a • Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
4
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the VES™ DVD player, check with the disc
these extensions for any other types of files.
recording software publisher for more information about
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
burning playable discs.
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those down(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
begin playing the next available file.
DVD player.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the next available file.
Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA
files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
supported. For both formats, the recommended visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the
DVD player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file, or
beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the
the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current or
first track.
previous file.
The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
• To change the current directory, use the remote conconditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperatrol’s PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip
ture is above 120°F. When this occurs, the DVD player
back and fast fwd/skip forward.
will display ⬙VES High Temp⬙ and will shut off the VES™
Disc Errors
displays until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙
player.
message is displayed on the VES™ and Radio displays
and the disc is automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or
incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a
⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
4
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display
Other Language Setup
All of the Language settings have a special ⬙Other⬙ setting
to accommodate languages other than Japanese or English. These languages are selected using a special fourdigit code.
To enter a new language code, activate the DVD Setup
Menu and follow these additional instructions:
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons, highlight the Language item you want to edit,
and then press the remote control ENTER button.
• Using the remote control Down cursor button, select
the ⬙Other⬙ setting, then press the remote control’s
Right cursor button to begin editing the setting.
DVD Player Language Menu
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons, select a digit for the current position. After
selecting the digit, press the remote control’s Right
cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit
selection sequence for all four digits.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
• When the entire four-digit code is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button. If the language code is
not valid, the numbers all change back to ⬙夡⬙. If the
digits are visible after this step, then the language code
is valid.
them where lower numbers are designated for all audiences and higher numbers are designated for more adult
audiences.
When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is compared
to the setting in the DVD player. If the rating of the disc
Here is an abbreviated list of language codes. For more is higher than the setting in the player, a Password screen
language codes, please contact the dealer where the is displayed. In order to watch the disc, the rear passenvehicle was purchased.
ger must enter the correct password using the password
entry method described below.
Language
Code
Language
Code
To play all discs without requiring a password, set the
Dutch
2311
French
1517
DVD player’s rating to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level
German
1304
Italian
1819
1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc.
Portuguese 2519
Spanish
1418
Not all DVD discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible
that discs designed for adult audiences can still play
Rating and Password Setup
without requiring a password.
The Rating and Password settings work together to
The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs without a
control the types of DVDs that your family watches. Most
password) and the default password is 0000.
DVD-Video discs have a rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to
4
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the password, activate the DVD Setup Menu and
follow these additional instructions:
• Using the remote control Left and Right cursor buttons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Password⬙, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the
value for the current digit, and then press the remote
control’s Right cursor button to select the next digit.
Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits.
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is
correct, the set password screen is displayed.
DVD Password Entry
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
• Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
buttons to set the value for the current digit and the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select digits,
enter the new password.
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change.
4
DVD Player Level Menu
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
follow these additional instructions:
buttons, select the new rating level, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change.
• Using the remote control’s Left and Right cursor
Product Agreement
buttons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Rating⬙, and then press the remote This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intelleccontrol’s ENTER button.
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons to set intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherthe value for the current digit, and then press the wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
remote control’s Right cursor button to select the next disassembly is prohibited.
digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four
Dolby® Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
digits.
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, ⬙MLP
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
correct, the Rating Level menu is displayed.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right
reserved.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
The 12 Channel High Voltage GreenEdge™ Class D
amplifier provides 7.1-channel simulated surround
This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation
sound from any stereo audio source. The Harman Karis subject to the following two conditions:
don® audio system offers the ability to choose surround
sound for any audio source while the high-efficiency
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
speaker designs ensure higher SPL with a dramatic
2. This device must accept any interference received,
increase in dynamic sound quality. The speakers are
including interference that may cause undesired optuned for maximum efficiency and perfectly matched to
eration.
the amplifier output stage ensuring state of the art
multi-seat surround sound processing.
HARMAN KARDON® HIGH PERFORMANCE
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
“Audio Surround” is optimized for front seat passengers
SURROUND (DSS) – IF EQUIPPED
for any audio source. This surround effect is available for
Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon® audio from any source – AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or
GreenEdge™ audio system which offers superior sound AUX – and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle
quality and high Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) with Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-Selectable
minimum energy consumption. The new system utilizes Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle Inforunique amplifier and speaker technologies delivering mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrusubstantial increases in component and system efficiency ment Panel”.
levels.
General Information
4
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DSS modes for audio sources are “Stereo” and “Audio
Surround,” which is surround sound equalized for the
front seat occupants. The “Video Surround” mode is
described under Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS). The
Video Surround Mode will only be available for video
media sources (DVDs, Video CDs, or other video media
supported by the radio). Some audio will sound better in
DSS modes, others in Stereo mode.
When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set automatically. Fader control is available in surround mode
but should be set to the center position for optimal
surround performance.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
positions.
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch CD Player
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
control is different depending on which mode you are in. after the current track begins to play.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
each mode.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
Radio Operation
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch center button will select the next available CD in the
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
player.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.
4
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particuTo keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
precautions:
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior
comfort level desired by the driver and passenger.
Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
— If Equipped
4
• The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows
both driver and front passenger seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.
• When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode
operation, Auto blower operation is set by using a
push button on the control unit and a comfort temperature setting by using the temperature up and
down buttons.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel
• The system provides set-and-forget operation for op- 1. A/C Button
timum comfort and convenience.
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch 6. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
into manual mode.
This display shows the temperature setting for the right
2. Recirculation Control Button
front seat occupant.
Press and release to change the current setting, the 7. Front Defrost Button
indicator illuminates when ON.
Press and release to change the current setting, the
3. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
indicator illuminates when ON. Performing this function
This display shows the temperature setting for the left will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The
blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is
front seat occupant.
selected.
4. Mode Display
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel,
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
Bi-Level, Floor, Mix).
control. Push the button for warmer temperature set5. Blower Control Display
tings.
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
12. Climate Control ON/OFF Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings. OFF
10. Auto Temperature Control Button
13. Mode Control Button
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
more information. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes.
Press and release to select between Modes (Panel, BiLevel, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the
ATC to switch into manual mode.
11. Blower Control
14. SYNC Button
Press and release to control the temperature setting for
both zones from the driver temperature control.
15. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the Provides the driver with independent temperature conlowest blower setting. Performing this function will trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
4
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
16. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
NOTE:
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
Automatic Operation
comfort as quickly as possible.
Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
Control (ATC) Panel.
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information
to maintain by adjusting the driver and front passenger
Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features
temperature control buttons. Once the desired tempera(SETUP)” in this section of the manual.
ture is displayed, the system will achieve and automati- To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
cally maintain that comfort level.
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
necessary to change the settings. You will experience the increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to Manual Operation
function automatically.
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently selected. This allows the front occupants to control the
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually, volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
temperature control will continue to operate automati- Auto mode.
cally.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the following positions.
Blower Control
There are seven fixed blower speeds.
Use the outer dial control to regulate
the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control clockwise and decreases
when you move the control counterclockwise.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by Bi-Level Mode
adjusting the blower control outer dial. The fan will now
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are
outlets and defrost outlets.
4
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi–Level temperature settings for best windshield and side winmode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel dow defrosting. When the defrost mode is selected, the
blower will automatically default to medium-high unless
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
the blower is controlled manually.
Floor Mode
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
of air is directed through the defrost and side
ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually
window demister outlets.
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window Air Conditioning (A/C)
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
while keeping the windshield clear.
system. When in A/C mode and the ATC is set to a cool
Defrost Mode
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air
Air comes from the windshield and side window outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and
deactivate the A/C system. Also, make sure to select only
Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
• If the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C
mode is not allowed in the Defrost modes to improve
can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disactive to prevent fogging of the windows.
abled automatically if Defrost is selected.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
Operating Tips
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
Window Fogging
Recirculation Control
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air
pressing the Recirculation control button. Redirection, and blower speed to maintain comfort.
circulation mode should only be used temporarily. The
recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
vehicle.
NOTE:
4
434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on Winter Operation
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the When operating the system during the winter months,
Defrost mode.
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstrucnon-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works tions.
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette Vacation Storage
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condiSummer Operation
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
NOTE: In some cases during high temperature trailer air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
tow operation the Air Conditioning system performance system lubrication to minimize the possibility of commay be reduced. This is to help protect the engine from pressor damage when the system is started again.
overheating during the high load condition.
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435
Operating Tips Chart
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .449
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .449
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 䡵 AUTOSTICK® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
䡵 SELEC-TRACK™ — IF EQUIPPED
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Active Damping System . . . . . . .
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . .
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . .
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .458
. . . . . . . . . .458
. . . . . . . . . .460
. . . . . . . . . .460
. . . . . . . . . .461
. . . . . . . . . .462
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED .463
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .479
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .481
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .466
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .466 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .486
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .488
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ All Season Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped. .490
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .491
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .505
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .496
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .497
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .500 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .511
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-NGo™ FOBIK is in the passenger
compartment.
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
Installing And Removing The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Installing The Button
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
Normal Starting
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and read- 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
able.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
position.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
Removing The Button
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, press the button again.
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
the button loose.
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Functions – With Driver’s
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/ Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle Or NEUTRAL Position)
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature operates similar to an
engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in and START. To change the ignition switch positions
PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the follow these steps.
ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the
EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle Not In • Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
Park” message and the engine will remain running. • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
could roll.
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob With
Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce- “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages.
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal,
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
(Continued)
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the shift lever is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be in PARK before
the ignition switch can be turned to the OFF position. The
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the
ignition is in the OFF position, and the shift lever is
locked in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must
press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
obtain service.
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
hundred miles (kilometers).
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
pedal must be pressed.
shifting between these gears.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE, • If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the ignition to the OFF position before restarting.
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions.
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift
restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the OFF
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section). Moving
position first.
the shift lever left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE
position, or tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted PARK
shift paddles (-/+), will manually select the transmission
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
cluster as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
Gear Ranges
vehicle in this range.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
• After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
especially important when the engine is cold.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, the shift
lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
(Continued)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second, SPORT mode is activated using the rotary switch on the
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth center console. Refer to “Selec-Trac” in “Starting And
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving Operating” for further information.
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as Transmission function is monitored electronically for
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
while towing heavy trailers), select TOW mode (refer to Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
⬙Selec-Trac⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙) or use the in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
“AutoStick®” shift control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will
section) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear
using TOW mode or a lower gear will improve perfor- is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will conmance and extend transmission life by reducing exces- tinue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
sive shifting and heat buildup.
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
SPORT
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power.
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomcan be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
following steps:
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
1. Stop the vehicle.
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
dealer service is required.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
5. Restart the engine.
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no ditions are present:
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal • the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
operation.
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
• the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situaheavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting octions.
curs, select TOW mode, using the rotary switch on the
center console. Selecting TOW mode will improve per- Operation
formance and reduce the potential for transmission overWhen the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the
heating or failure due to excessive shifting. Refer to
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
“Selec-Trac” in “Starting And Operating” for further
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick®, simply
information.
tap the shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the
DRIVE position, or tap one of the steering wheelAUTOSTICK®
mounted shift paddles (+/-). Tapping (-) to enter
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature AutoStick® mode will downshift the transmission to the
providing manual shift control, giving you more control next lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick®
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize en- mode will retain the current gear. When AutoStick® is
gine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down- active, the current transmission gear is displayed in the
shifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
instrument cluster. In AutoStick® mode, the transmission
will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by
the driver (using the shift lever, or the shift paddles),
When to Use TOW Mode
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would • You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
icy conditions.
below.
• Normally, in AutoStick® mode, the transmission will • The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is
reached. If, however, AutoStick® is engaged while in
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is enSPORT or TRACK mode, the transmission will remain
gaged.
in the selected gear even when maximum engine
speed is reached. The transmission will upshift only • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
when commanded by the driver.
AutoStick® is engaged.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the To disengage AutoStick® mode, hold the shift lever to the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will right or press and hold the (+) shift paddle until “D” is
once again displayed in the instrument cluster. You can
display the current gear.
shift in or out of the AutoStick® mode at any time
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
SELEC-TRACK™ — IF EQUIPPED
Description
Selec-Track™ combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
best performance for all terrains.
Selec-Track™ Switch
Selec-Track™ consists of the following positions:
• Sport – Dry weather, on-road calibration. Performance
based tuning that provides a rear wheel drive feel but
with improved handling and acceleration over a twowheel drive vehicle. The customer has the option of
going to partial ESC. The active suspension system
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
will be in Semi Firm mode, and a green flag will light • Track – Calibration for use on high traction surfaces.
Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding may
up in the instrument cluster. The transmission will
be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake
provide a more aggressive shifting pattern (Refer to
controls are set to Partial OFF to limit traction control
“AutoStick®” in “Starting And Operating” for further
management of throttle and wheel spin.
information). This feature will reset to AUTO on an
ignition cycle.
• The transmission will be in SPORT mode and provide
a more aggressive shifting pattern. Refer to
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
“AutoStick®” in “Starting And Operating” for further
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces
information.
such as snow. When in Snow mode (depending on
certain operating conditions), the transmission may
• The customer has the option of going to FULL OFF
use second gear (rather than first gear) during
with no interaction from the ESC System. The active
launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
suspension system will be in Full Firm mode. A green
flag will light up in the instrument cluster.
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
operation can be used on and off road. Balances
• This feature will reset to AUTO on an ignition cycle.
traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel • Tow – Use this mode for towing. Vehicle suspension
drive vehicles. The active suspension system will be in
will go to Firm mode and peak power will be limited
in the engine controls. Trailer sway control is enabled
Touring Mode.
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
in the ESC system. The terrain switch will remain in DRIVING THROUGH WATER
this position through an ignition cycle until the cus- Driving through water more than a few inches/
tomer cycles into another position.
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Active Damping System
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled
damping system. This system reduces body roll and pitch
in many driving situations including cornering, acceleration and braking. There are 3 modes:
• Touring Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO
and SNOW) — Used during highway speeds where a
touring suspension feel is desired.
• Firm Mode (Available in terrain positions SPORT and
TOW) — Provides a firm suspension for better handling.
• Full Firm (Available in TRACK mode) — Provides a
full firm suspension for an aggressive track experience.
CAUTION!
• Due to lower ground clearance, driving your vehicle up steep driveways, approach ramps or near
parking blocks may cause damage to the front
fascia and ground effects.
• Driving through snow more than 4 inches (100 mm)
deep may cause damage to the front fascia and
ground effects.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
(Continued)
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
(Continued)
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED
does not in any way damage the steering system.
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
Parking Brake
disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Never
leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
(Continued)
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
CAUTION!
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
Also, your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control
(TSC).
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability.
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited-slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further
information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
This system enhances directional control and stability of
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corThe “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lorects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
The ESC system has three available operating modes.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent collisions.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
(Continued)
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC . Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off”
mode for specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESC, except for the BLD feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” switch. This
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
5
ESC OFF Switch
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
odometer. Press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message. The “ESC OFF” message may appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. To turn ESC ON again, momentarily press the “ESC
Off” switch.
Full Off
NOTE: The ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved
into the PARK position from any position other than
PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This
will occur when the message was previously cleared.
This mode is available in TRACK mode only. Refer to
“Selec-Terrain” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information. In this mode, all TCS and ESC stability
features are turned OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode,
press and hold the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds
while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running.
After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate,
and the ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display in the vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. ⴖESC Offⴖ mode is intended for off-highway
or off-road use only.
NOTE: When the ESC is switched OFF, a feature of the
system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin
across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.
If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel
and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction
when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch
to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the
“ESC Off” switch.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched OFF, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Full
Off” ESC mode is intended for off-highway or offroad only.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to
stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo- • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acthat caused the ESC activation.
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
• Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo- • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuadhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
of this manual.
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• The following table shows examples on how to calcu“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
= 650 lbs [295 kg]).
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
• For the following example, the combined weight of
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
(392 kg).
capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well
as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at
least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not outside temperature condition.
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditemperature changes.
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- Radial Ply Tires
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
WARNING!
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
WARNING!
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. AlHigh speed driving with your vehicle at or above
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on
combine them with other types of tires.
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
75 mph (120 km/h).
All Season Tires – If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching temporary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
with one of the following types of non-matching temporary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck.
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
5
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
replaced.
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
Life Of Tire
WARNING! (Continued)
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
Replacement Tires
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires, typically have a reduced The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main- characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manutenance schedule is highly recommended.
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
WARNING!
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
different loads and perform different steering, handling, correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
shown in the following diagram.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with run flat tires — When
the TPMS indicates a tire pressure of 14 psi (96 kPa) or
lower, always check tire pressure and replace the tire at
the first opportunity. At inflation pressure of/or below 14
psi (96 kPa) the tire is in the run-flat mode of operation.
In this condition, it is recommended a vehicle maximum
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) for a maximum distance of 50
miles (80 km). Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
using the run flat feature while driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or towing a trailer.
Tire Rotation
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour
period. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to properly
inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there
should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has
been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off. The
system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still
be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure NOTE:
value.
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
CAUTION!
failure or condition.
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
while adjusting your tire pressure.
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
damage may result when using replacement equipUnder-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
stopping ability.
not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainteto the sensors may result.
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisif under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
Light.
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
the tire.
Premium System – If Equipped
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an aureadings to the Receiver Module.
dible chime will be activated, when one or more of the
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages
(Left Front, Left Rear, Right Front, Right Rear) for a
the proper pressure.
minimum of five seconds, and a graphic display of the
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) “flashing.” Refer to
following components:
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un• Receiver Module
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units The system will automatically update, the graphic disin PSI, kPa, or BAR.
play of the pressure value(s) will stop “flashing,” and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
and inflate the low tire(s) that is “flashing” on the graphic in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure.
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault is detected possibly related to the trigger component an incorrect sensor location fault. In this case, the
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is then followed by a
graphic display, with pressure values still shown. This
indicates the pressure values are still being received from
the TPM Sensors but they may not be located in the
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
correct vehicle position. However, the system still needs seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
to be serviced as long as the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
message exists.
pressure value. Once you repair or replace the original
NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the
road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically.
pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a
Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime will new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
sound, and the EVIC will still display a “flashing” tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
pressure value in the graphic display. After driving the any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,
General Information
the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
place of the pressure value. For each subsequent ignition RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
switch cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure following conditions:
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 • This device may not cause harmful interference.
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
• This device must accept any interference received, Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
including interference that may cause undesired op- your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
eration.
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow- required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experiing licenses:
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
United States
MRXC4W4MA4
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the WorldFUEL REQUIREMENTS
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
6.4L Engine
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speciThe 6.4L engine is designed to meet all fications if they are available.
emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when Reformulated Gasoline
using high-quality premium unleaded Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
higher.
Canada
2546A-C4W4MA4
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
CAUTION! (Continued)
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
may be used in your vehicle.
not be covered under warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
(Continued)
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• operate in a lean mode
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• poor engine performance
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• poor cold start and cold drivability
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
E-85 perform the following:
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
• change the engine oil and oil filter
Materials Added To Fuel
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
engine controller memory
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door,
on the driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
5
Fuel Filler Cap
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler
cap.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
(Continued)
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the malfunction indicator light
to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
• If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will come
on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
5
2. Push down on the inboard edge of the left storage bin,
this will pop up the outboard edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
disengage snaps.
Release Cable
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label Payload
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
This label contains the month and year of manufacture, weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires Loading
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
Rim Size
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
Inflation Pressure
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way and recommendations in this manual concerning vethe brakes operate.
hicles used for trailer towing.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
further information.
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle CertificaThe GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or teminformation.
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
WARNING!
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
supported by the scale.
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tongue Weight (TW)
Weight-Distributing Hitch
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be
more than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Class
Class
Class
Class
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
6.4L Automatic
GCWR (Gross
Max. GTW (Gross
Combined Wt. RatFrontal Area
Trailer Wt.)
ing)
10,400 lbs (4
40 sq. ft. (3.72 sq
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
717 kg)
m)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Max. Trailer Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
500 lbs (227 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
front is the cause of many trailer collisions. Never exceed
the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part
hitch.
of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire–
Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
NOTE:
• Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend using the
run flat feature while driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or towing a trailer.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the GTW
on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consider the following items when computing the Towing Requirements
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive• The tongue weight of the trailer
train components, the following guidelines are recom• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment mended.
put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
WARNING! (Continued)
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized .
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
1,653 lbs (750 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
Towing Requirements – Tires
– Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
– Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper
inspection procedure.
– When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Tips
– Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe NOTE: To provide optimum towing performance and to
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to protect transmission components always select Trailer
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper- Tow mode when towing a trailer.
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy minutes of continuous operation, then change the transmission fluid and filter as specified for ⬙police, taxi, fleet,
traffic.
or frequent trailer towing.⬙ Refer to the “Maintenance
Automatic Transmission
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
AutoStick®
transmission controls include an adaptive drive strategy
to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if • When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
the AutoStick® shift control to manually select a lower
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if
gear.
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or
“2” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor- • To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
mance and extend transmission life by reducing excesdriving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
provide better engine braking.
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
Air Conditioning
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Turn off temporarily.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until MOTORHOME, ETC.)
you can get back to cruising speed.
Recreational towing is not allowed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
CAUTION!
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
Towing this vehicle with any of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans- NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed. vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .528 䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Run Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . .546
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
6
528 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
speed.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your an impending overheat condition:
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
other motorists.
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 529
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
WARNING! (Continued)
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
6
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
(Continued)
(Continued)
530 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Run Flat Tires
This vehicle is equipped with a compact spare along with
run flat tires. Although the tires are designed with a “run
flat” feature that allows the vehicle to be driven approximately 50 miles (80 km) at 55 mph (88 km/h). immediate
service should be obtained.
NOTE: The compact spare tire is to be used fro rear
wheel(s) only. For a flat front tire, move the rear tire to the
front and use the compact spare on the rear.
WARNING!
• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” is illuminated.
Vehicle handling and braking may be reduced. You
could have a collision and be severely or fatally
injured.
• Do not tow a trailer when using the compact spare
tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 531
Jack Location
Spare Tire Stowage
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
cargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing
nut.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
Jack Storage Location
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
6
532 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
7. For vehicle equipped with Quadra-Lift® refer to
“Quadra-Lift® — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information on disabling automatic leveling.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.”
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
6
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
534 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is
still on the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jack and Tool Assembly
Jacking Locations
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 535
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange
just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular
lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
6
Front Jacking Location
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as
indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
Rear Jacking Location
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the
spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 537
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
6
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel
nut tightness is 110 ft-lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return
Stowed Spare
it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
tray.
soon as possible, properly secure the spare tire with
12. Remove the small center cap and securely store the
the special wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m),
road wheel in the cargo area.
reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the
rear load floor cover.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightlug nuts.
ness of each lug nut is 110 ft-lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service
station.
6
540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
CAUTION! (Continued)
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
JUMP-STARTING
WARNING!
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. Preparations For Jump-Start
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenfollow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and ger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
precautions.
the hood to assist in jump-starting.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541
WARNING!
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
6
542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive Jump-Starting Procedure
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove
it.
WARNING!
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
the reverse sequence:
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posibattery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
tive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
battery.
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
6
544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph or less. Whenever the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage
DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further inforsteering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
front wheels. Press and hold the lock button on the shift
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
lever. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 545
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
(Continued)
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
6
546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
damage to the vehicle.
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
WARNING!
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
1. Turn the engine OFF.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus3. Remove the rubber liner from the cupholder (located
ing serious injury.
next to the shifter on the center console).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547
4. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the 5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
shift lever override access cover (located on the bot6. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
tom of the cupholder).
hole, and push and hold the override release lever
down.
7. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
9. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover and
cupholder liner.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
6
548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle using any other method could
result in extensive damage to the transfer case
and/or transmission.
• Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .552
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .555
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
7
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . .599
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . .587
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .600
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) – If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
▫ Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .596
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Washer Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
soon as possible.
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
do the following:
PROGRAMS
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
crank or start the engine.
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
this test over.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
of a normal bulb check.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
7
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainteIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your nance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacauthorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was turer’s warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself.
services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
penalties being assessed against you.
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
7
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the
engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding one quart of oil
when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
NOTE: Fill engine oil one quart at a time.
CAUTION!
• Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration
or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Operating the engine with the oil levels below the
safe zone, or operating with oil levels that exceed
the top of the safe zone may cause engine damage.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SM or
SM/CF.
Change Engine Oil
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is SAE 0W-40 engine oil or equivalent.
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity
SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic engine oil is preferred for use
in all operating temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Synthetic Engine Oils
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its Engine Oil Filter Selection
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi- This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
tives.
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
filter and are recommended.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service Engine Air Cleaner Filter
station or governmental agency for advice on how and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in maintenance intervals.
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
7
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
CAUTION!
• Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter
motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.
• Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• When temperatures are below the freezing point,
electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze. Do
not attempt jump-starting because the battery
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Battery temperature must be brought above the
freezing point before attempting a jump-start.
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by moving
fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
• Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of
the discharged battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode and could
result in personal injury.
(Continued)
7
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
WARNING!
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
A/C Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
7
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
A/C Air Filter Replacement
lower the door.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
cover.
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
CAUTION!
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
replace it more often.
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position. Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces- 1 — Wiper Arm
sary.
2 — Pivot Cap
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this ward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
liftgate glass.
blade off of the liftgate glass.
7
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
blade holder.
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be
indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
(Continued)
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
against you.
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe Cooling System
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
WARNING!
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica• When working near the radiator cooling fan,
tions, should be obtained immediately.
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damswitch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
age:
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
switch is in the ON position.
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
motion.
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
vehicle.
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
7
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant only. Check
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with
bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water
OAT coolant only. Properly dispose of the old engine
from a garden hose vertically down the face of the
coolant (antifreeze) solution.
condenser.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubmaintenance intervals.
ber, cracking , tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for Selection Of Coolant
leaks.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
Coolant Checks
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be flushed with
OAT coolant and replaced with the specified OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
7
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Please review these recommendations for using Organic Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainAdditive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze). tain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Technology).
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F (−37° C) are Cooling System Pressure Cap
anticipated.
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolUsed ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is ant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
with your local authorities to determine the disposal bottle need only be checked once a month.
7
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antimaintain the proper level, it should be added to the
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezPoints To Remember
ing.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
from the front of the engine compartment. This is norfor leaks.
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
engine which contains aluminum components.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir
of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of
the master cylinder area before removing cap. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low,
check system for leaks.
7
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
CAUTION!
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be them and cause them to leak.
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill
tion.
hole.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
The front axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m) on axles with aluminum
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill
housings. The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be
hole.
tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs (30 to 70 N·m) on axles with
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to cast iron housings.
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
7
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage then
and cause them to leak.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
Selection Of Lubricant
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. RecomUse only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain- 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should
be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION! (Continued)
Selection Of Lubricant
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specionly the manufacturer’s recommended transmission fications.
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications. It is Special Additives
important to maintain the transmission fluid at the The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
correct level using the recommended fluid.
any special additives in the transmission.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be product and its performance may be impaired by suppleused.
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
CAUTION!
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac- adversely affect seals.
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
(Continued)
7
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
provided. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using a special service dipstick.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
• If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission
damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the
proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission
is disassembled for any reason.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
7
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
packaged and sealed.
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
and tarnishing.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
7
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting.
ner:
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel.
leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products.
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
7
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
rag.
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear Seat Belt Maintenance
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
scratch the elements.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Glass Surfaces
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
directly on the mirror.
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment. This center contains cartridge fuses
and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the
cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover
that corresponds to the following chart.
7
Totally Integrated Power Module
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
J01
J02
J03
J04
J05
J06
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
40 Amp
Green
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Air Suspension
J07
Power Liftgate
Module
Trailer Tow
J08
J09
Driver Door Node
J10
Passenger Door
Node
Antilock Brakes
Pump/Stability
Control System
J11
J12
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
Mini
Fuse
Description
Antilock Brakes
Valve/Stability
Control System
Power Seat
E-Brake
Headlamp Wash
Relay Contact
Drive Train Control
Module
Rear Defroster
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
Cavity
J13
J14
J15
J17
J18
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Blue
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Blue
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Main Ignition Off
Draw (IOD)
Trailer Tow
Lamps/Park Lamps
Front Cabin Fan/
Blower
Starter Motor Solenoid
Powertrain Control
Module/Powertrain
Control Module/
Transmission Range
J19
J20
J21
J22
M1
M2
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
Mini
Fuse
Description
Radiator Fan Motor
HI/Radiator Fan
Motor Low
Front Wiper
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
Front/Rear Washer
Control
Sunroof Module
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
Stop Lamps
Electronic Limit
Slip Differential/
Air Suspension
7
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M3
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Liftgate/Headrest
115V AC Power
Inverter
Cigar Lighter
Power Outlet #2
(Switchable)
Front Heated Seat
& Steering Wheel
Rear Heated Seats
Mini
Fuse
Description
M10
15 Amp
Blue
M11
10 Amp
Red
M12
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Video/Universal
Garage Door
Opener
Heating, Ventilation
& Air Conditioning
(Climate Control
System)
Radio/Amplifier
M13
M14
Cartridge
Fuse
Instrument Cluster
Back Up Camera –
If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
Cavity
M15
M16
M18
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
20 Amp
Yellow
Power Seat
Module(s)/
Adaptive Cruise
Control/Audio
Telematics/
Daytime Running
Lights Relay/Air
Suspension
Module/Instrument
Cluster
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Stop Lamp
M19
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
Automatic Shutdown 1 and 2
Instrument Cluster
Automatic Shutdown 3
Horns (Low/High)
– Right
Horns (Low/High)
– Left
Rear Wiper
7
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M25
M26
M27
M28
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump Motor
Output/Diesel Lift
Pump (Export
Only)
Driver Door Switch
Bank
Ignition Switch/
Wireless Control
Module/Keyless
Entry Module
Powertrain
Controller/
Transmission Controller
M29
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
M30
M31
M32
M33
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Tire Pressure Monitor – If Equipped
J1962 Diag Connector
Backup Lamps
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Powertrain
Controller/
Transmission Controller
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
Cavity
Mini
Fuse
Description
CAUTION!
M34
10 Amp
Red
M35
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Park Assist
Module/Climate
Control System
Module/Infra Red
Sensor/Compass
Module
Left Rear
Parklamps
Power Outlet
• When installing the totally integrated power module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do
so may allow water to get into the totally integrated
power module and possibly result in a electrical
system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
M36
M37
M38
Cartridge
Fuse
25 Amp
Natural
Antilock Brakes/
Stability Control
System Module
All Door Lock
&Unlock
7
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery. Interior Bulbs
You may:
• Remove fuse #J13 in the Totally Integrated Power Glove Box Lamp
Module (TIPM) labeled Main Ignition-Off Draw (IOD). Grab Handle Lamp
Overhead Console Read• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
ing Lamps
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the Rear Cargo Lamp
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes Visor Vanity Lamp
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will Underpanel Courtesy
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the Lamps
possibility of compressor damage when the system is Instrument Cluster (Genstarted again.
eral Illumination)
Telltale/Hazard Lamp
Bulb Number
194
L002825W5W
VT4976
214–2
V26377
906
103
74
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps (Low Beam)
Headlamps (High Beam)
Headlamps (Low Beam)
– High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL)
Front Fog Lamps
Front Side Marker
Front Park/Turn Lamp
Aux Aperature Backup
Lamps
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail
Lamps
Liftgate Backup Lamps
Bulb Number
H11
9005
D1S (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
3157K
PSX24W
194
7444NA
7440 (W21W)
W3W
921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps
Rear Turn/Stop/Tail
Lamps
Bulb Number
W5W
3057
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be
purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) – If
Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
7
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped
an authorized dealer for service.
1. Open the hood.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps , when the headlamps are
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10
seconds, as the system charges.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze
them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the
front fog lamp housing.
Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counter3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
clockwise to remove from housing.
the housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp
connector.
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
7
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with
the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back
of the front fog lamp housing.
5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are
engaged in the slots of the collar.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp
housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are
fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp
connector.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from
lamp.
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Once lower trim is loose, close the liftgate.
4. Open the flipper glass.
5. Pull up glass seal at bottom of window opening.
6. Remove small trim panel around liftgate glass striker.
7. Close flipper glass and raise the liftgate.
8. Continue removing the trim.
9. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
7
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
10. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter
clockwise.
11. Remove/replace bulb(s).
12. Reinstall the socket(s)
13. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Rear License Lamp
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly. 1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
snap tab to remove the license lamp lens.
2. Pull bulb from socket.
3. Replace bulb.
4. Reinstall lens.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
25 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified)
7 Quarts
Cooling System*
6.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
16 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
94 Liters
6.6 Liters
15.5 Liters
7
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils
that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SM or
SM/CF.
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic SAE 0W-40 engine
oil.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs. (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use 75W-85 Fuch 5010D
We recommend you use 75W-85 Castrol SAF Carbon
Mod.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid,
SAE J1703. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid
+4, MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . .608
8
606 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating NOTE:
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
if it has been six months since your last oil change,
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
illuminated.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be disvehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 607
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator • Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
as required.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
master cylinder, and power steering, and add as
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
needed.
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
formation.
At Each Stop For Fuel
At Each Oil Change
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance • Change the engine oil filter.
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Ve- • Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
hicle” for further information.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
8
608 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 609
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or 6
Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12
months.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
610 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or 18
Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 611
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or 30
Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36
Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or 42
Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals for cracks or
leaks and all parts for damage, wear,
improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
Odometer Reading
Odometer Reading
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
8
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
612 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or 54
Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 613
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of
the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏ Inspect the accessory drive belt(s), replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
614 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 615
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or
84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner
filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals for cracks or
leaks and all parts for damage, wear,
improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
Odometer Reading
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
8
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
616 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 617
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or
108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner
filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals for cracks or
leaks and all parts for damage, wear,
improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
Odometer Reading
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
8
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
618 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months or 150,000 miles (250 000 km)
whichever comes first.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Drain the transfer case and refill.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 619
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or
132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner
filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals for cracks or
leaks and all parts for damage, wear,
improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
Odometer Reading
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
8
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
620 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 150,000 miles (250 000 km) or 120
months whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 621
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .629
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .626
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .626
▫ In Mexico contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .630
9
624 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 625
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
626 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (877) 426–5337
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 627
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
628 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 629
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
operating at its best.
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: AdministraREPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other informaIn The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
tion about motor vehicle safety from http://
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer.
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
MOPAR® PARTS
9
630 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 631
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
9
632 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX 633
INDEX
10
634 INDEX
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .218
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 78
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76, 81, 110, 305
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72, 75, 77, 78
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . .73, 75, 78
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .559
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561, 562
Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427, 561
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 314
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570, 601
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .427
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449, 580
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579, 580
INDEX 635
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
.579
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
.579
.456 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
.277 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . .107
.277 Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594, 595
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .25 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 110 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 508
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . .
Special Additives . . . .
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet
Auxiliary Power Outlet . .
...........
...........
...........
(Power Outlet)
...........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10
636 INDEX
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .553
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354, 364
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .379
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .572
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570, 573
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
INDEX 637
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . .570, 601
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 432
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .332
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .277
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . .215, 218
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . .308, 315
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
10
638 INDEX
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .553
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50, 109, 508
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504, 601
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556, 601
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557, 601
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50, 109, 508
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 567
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.559
.563
.559
.559
.528
.528
INDEX 639
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 307, 597, 598
Flipper Glass, Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .602
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307, 597
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .242, 327, 351
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Front Axle (Differential). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508, 511
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504, 601
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
10
640 INDEX
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . .508, 511, 552
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . .19, 28, 165, 240, 503
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124, 294
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .261
INDEX 641
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529, 531
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12, 14 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 442
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12, 340
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Kicker Sound System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
10
642 INDEX
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 195
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76, 81, 110, 305
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .474
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307, 597
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595, 596
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .305
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202, 259
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .305
INDEX 643
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .305, 553
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560 Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Tow/Haul Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 195, 597, 598
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
10
644 INDEX
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Mopar Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554, 629
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 75, 79
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . .72, 73, 75, 78
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557, 601
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558, 601
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314, 528
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .5, 630
INDEX 645
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .482
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .277
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172, 174
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270, 273
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .23
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . .
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . .
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.489
.572
.426
.424
.210
.577
.256
.131
.283
.247
.185
10
646 INDEX
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .424
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50, 109
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 110
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .59
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
INDEX 647
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 172
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Security Against Theft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 314
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .305
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354, 364
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 307, 597, 598
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Sound System
Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491, 492, 531
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .215, 218
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
10
648 INDEX
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 441
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211, 212
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211, 212
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .424
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434, 594
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270, 273
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .69
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211, 212
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .427
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211, 212
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .482
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 486, 631
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
INDEX 649
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482, 483
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476, 486
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Tow/Haul Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 548
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .525
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
10
650 INDEX
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447, 449, 579
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .261
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .23
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307, 597, 598
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .379
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483, 512
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434, 594
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206, 566
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
INDEX 651
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 272, 276
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
13WK741-126-AF
Fifth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
2013 Grand Cherokee SRT8
FCA US LLC
2013
OWNER’S MANUAL
Grand Cherokee
SRT8
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement